Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual 2022

Owner’s Manual

2022 PILOT

Honda PILOT Owner’s Manual 2022 Download


Event Data Recorders

 

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

 

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice

This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety

 

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels – on the vehicle.
Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
Safety Headings – such as Important Safety Precautions.
Safety Section – such as Safe Driving.
Instructions – how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information – please read it carefully.

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com (U.S.) or honda.ca (Canada). If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com. In Canada, please request a copy from your Honda dealer.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34 Seat Belts P. 39 Airbags P. 47

Instrument Panel P. 81
Indicators P. 82 Gauges and Displays P. 110

Controls P. 135
Clock P. 136 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 139

Moonroof* P. 169 Panoramic Roof* P. 170

Adjusting the Seats P. 194 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 209

Features P. 239
Audio System P. 240

General Information on the Audio System P. 349

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 448 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 451, 476

Driving P. 503
Before Driving P. 504 Towing a Trailer P. 510

Parking Your Vehicle P. 608 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 619

Maintenance P. 625
Before Performing Maintenance P. 626 Maintenance MinderTM P. 629 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 652

Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care* P. 668 Accessories and Modifications P. 677

Handling the Unexpected P. 679
Tools P. 680 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 681

Overheating P. 695 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 697

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 707

Information P. 711
Specifications P. 712 Identification Numbers P. 714

Emissions Testing P. 717 Warranty Coverages P. 719

Child Safety P. 62 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 78 Safety Labels P. 79

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 153

Security System P. 163

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 166

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 171

Adjusting the Mirrors P. 192

Climate Control System P. 231

Audio System Basic Operation P. 247, 265

Audio Error Messages P. 344

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System* P. 374

Customized Features P. 422, 429

CabinTalkTM * P. 502

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 520

When Driving P. 522

Honda Sensing® P. 559

Braking P. 604

Refueling P. 621

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 624

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 635

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 647

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 656

Battery P. 665

Remote Transmitter Care P. 667

Climate Control System Maintenance P. 670

Cleaning P. 672

Engine Does Not Start P. 689

If the Battery Is Dead P. 692

Fuses P. 701

Emergency Towing P. 706

Refueling P. 708

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 709

 

Contents

Quick Reference Guide P. 6

Safe Driving P. 33

Instrument Panel P. 81

Controls P. 135

Features P. 239

Driving P. 503

Maintenance P. 625

Handling the Unexpected P. 679

Information P. 711

Index P. 725

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 715 Reporting Safety Defects P. 716

Authorized Manuals P. 722 Customer Service Information P. 723

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚ECON Button (P543)

❚ (Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)

System OFF) Button (P547)

❚Parking Sensor System Button* (P611)

❚System Indicators (P82)

Gauges (P110)

❚Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) OFF Button (P565)

❚Driver Information

❚Heated Windshield Button

*

Interface (P111)

(P187)

❚Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)

Button (P598)

❚Audio System (P247, 265)

❚Navigation System*

() See the Navigation System Manual

❚Audio/Information Screen (P248, 266)

❚Hazard Warning Button

❚Climate Control System (P231)

❚Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

Button (P186)

❚Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*

(P374)

❚Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P225)

❚Front Seat Heaters and Seat

Ventilator Buttons* (P226)

❚ENGINE START/STOP Button (P171)

❚Steering Wheel Adjustments (P191)

6

❚Headlights/Turn Signals (P174, 175)

❚Fog Lights* (P178)

Quick

❚LaneWatchTM* (P552)

Reference

❚Audio Remote Control Buttons (P244)

❚Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(P537)

❚ 3 / 4 Button (P113, 244)

Guide

❚Brightness Control (P188)

❚Paddle Shifter (Shift up) (P537)

❚Wipers/Washers (P183)

❚Heated Steering Wheel Button* (P228)

❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons

(P574)

❚Interval Button (P582)

❚Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button

(P589)

❚MAIN Button (P575)

❚Horn (Press an area around

.)

 

Navigation System Voice Control Buttons* () See the Navigation System Manual
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P451, 476)
(home) Button (P113, 244)
ENTER Button (P113, 244)
* Not available on all models 7

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Power Window Switches (P166)

❚Master Door Lock Switch (P151)

❚Memory Buttons* (P190)

❚SET Button* (P190)

❚Power Tailgate Button* (P157)

❚Fuel Fill Door Release Button

(P622)

❚Rearview Mirror (P192)

❚HomeLink® Buttons* (P449)

❚Door Mirror Controls (P193)

❚Driver’s Front Airbag (P50)

❚Passenger’s Front Airbag (P50)

❚Accessory Power Socket (P217)

❚USB Port (P241)

❚Glove Box (P213)

❚Shift Button (P530)

❚Interior Fuse Box (P704)

❚Parking Brake (P604)

❚Interior Fuse Box (P703)

❚Hood Release Handle (P636)

Mode Button* (P544)
Snow Button* (P544)
Auto Idle Stop OFF Button (P539)
Accessory Power Socket (P217)
Auxiliary Input Jack (P242)
USB Port (P241)
8

Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P44)
Cargo Area Light (P212)
Side Curtain Airbags (P57)
Grab Handle
Coat Hook (P222)
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System* (P374)

❚Seat Belts (P39)

❚Moonroof Switch* (P169)

❚Panoramic Roof Switch* (P170)

❚Map Lights (P210)

❚Sunglasses Holder (P223)

❚Sun Visors

❚Vanity Mirrors

❚Front Seat (P194)

❚Side Airbags (P55)

AC Power Outlet* (P218)
USB Ports* (P242)
HDMITM Port* (P377)
Second Row Outer Seat Heater Buttons* (P227)
Second Row Seat (P198)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P71)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P73)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P67)
Third Row Seat (P199)
Accessory Power Socket* (P218)
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 9

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Maintenance Under the Hood (P635)

❚Windshield Wipers (P183, 652)

❚Power Door Mirrors (P193)

❚Side Turn Signal Lights* (P174, 650)

❚Door Lock/Unlock Control (P142)

❚Headlights (P175, 647)

❚Front Side Marker Lights (P175, 648)

❚Daytime Running Lights/Parking Lights

(P175, 182, 648)

❚Fog Lights* (P178, 649)

❚Tires (P656, 681)

❚Front Turn Signal Lights (P174, 649)

❚How to Refuel (P622)

❚High-Mount Brake Light (P651)

❚Rear Wiper (P185, 654)

❚Rear License Plate Lights (P651)

❚Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P153)

❚Back-Up Lights (P651)

❚Brake/Taillights (P651)

❚Tailgate Outer Handle (P161)

❚Multi-View Rear Camera (P619)

❚Brake/Taillights (P650)

❚Rear Side Marker Lights (P650)

❚Rear Turn Signal Lights (P650)

10

Auto Idle Stop Function

 

To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P538)

At

Automatic transmission

Engine status

Deceleration

Stop the vehicle and depress the brake

pedal.

Quick Reference Guide

Stop

On

Keep the brake pedal depressed.

Start-up

Off

Release the brake pedal.

Restarting

* Not available on all models 11

Quick Reference Guide

Eco Assist® System

 

Ambient Meter

The color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
ECON Button (P543 )

Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P90 )

Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.

12

Safe Driving (P33)

 

Airbags (P47)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P62)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P78)

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Quick Reference Guide

Before Driving Checklist (P504)

Seat Belts (P39)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.

● Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,

steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

13

Quick Reference Guide

Instrument Panel (P81)

 

Gauges (P110)/Driver Information Interface (P111)/System Indicators (P82)

M (Sequential mode) Indicator/

Immobilizer System

Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator

Indicator/Security

System Indicators

Temperature Gauge

Tachometer

System Alarm Indicator

Intelligent Traction

Speedometer

Malfunction Indicator

Management

Lamp

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Electric Power Steering

(EPS) System Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability

AssistTM (VSA®) OFF

Indicator

Parking Brake and

Gear Position Indicator/ Driver Information Interface Fuel Gauge

U.S.

Transmission System

Brake System Indicator Indicator

(Amber)

Canada

Anti-lock Brake System

Lights Indicators

(ABS) Indicator

System Indicators

Lights On Indicator

Blind spot information

High Beam Indicator

System Indicator*

Lane Keeping Assist

Adaptive Cruise

System (LKAS)

Fog Light Indicator*

Control (ACC) Indicator

Indicator (Green/

Auto High-Beam

(Green/Amber)

Amber)

Indicator

System Indicators

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

U.S. Parking Brake and

Brake System Indicator

Canada (Red)

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

Econ Mode Indicator

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)/ Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

System Message

Indicator

Road Departure

Mitigation (RDM)

Indicator

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator

All-wheel drive

(AWD) Indicator*

14

Controls (P135)

Clock (P136)

Models with color audio system

a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button for two seconds.

b Select Adjust Clock, then press .

c Rotate to adjust the hours.

d Press to switch to minute adjustment.

e Rotate to adjust the minutes.

f Press to switch to Set.

g Press to complete clock adjustment.

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

 

Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Models with Display Audio

To adjust time

To adjust date

a Select , then select Settings.

b Select System, then Date & Time.

c Select Set Date & Time.

d Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.

e Select Set Date or Set Time.

f Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by selecting 3/ 4.

g Select Save to set the time.

Models with navigation system

The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

ENGINE START/STOP Button (P171)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 15

Quick Reference Guide

Turn Signals (P174)

Turn Signal Control Lever Right

Left

Lights (P175)

Light Control Switches

High Beam

Low Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

 

(P183)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

MIST

OFF

AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies

automatically

INT*2: Low speed with

intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.

Adjustment Ring

(-: Low Sensitivity*1

(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High Sensitivity*1

(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2

*1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers

*2:Models without automatic intermittent wipers

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Steering Wheel (P191)

To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then pull up the lever back in place.
16

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside

(P150)

Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Tailgate (P153)

 

Models with Hands Free Access

Use a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the keyless remote.

1 sec.

Outer Handle

Models without keyless access system

With all the doors unlocked, press the tailgate outer handle and lift open the tailgate.
Models without keyless access system

Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock and open the tailgate when you carry the keyless remote.
Models with power tailgate

Press the power tailgate button on the driver’s door or the remote transmitter to open and close the power tailgate.
Quick Reference Guide

17

Quick Reference Guide

Power Door Mirrors

(P193)

With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Press the folding button* to fold in and out the door mirrors.
Folding Button* Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P166)

 

With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button Indicator

Window Switch

18

Climate Control System (P231)

 

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Rear Climate Control* (P236)

Press the AUTO button to activate the rear climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Quick

AUTO Button

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Switch

(On/Off) Button

SYNC

(Synchronization) Button

Mode Control Button

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

(Recirculation)

Button

Passenger’s Side

Temperature

Control Switch

(Windshield Defroster) Button

A/C (Air

Conditioning)

Button

Fan Control

Button

Rear Temperature

/

Control Buttons

(Rear

Fan

Control) Buttons

Rear AUTO

Button

(Rear On/

Off) Button

Mode Control Button

Air flows from the rear console vents.

Air flow from the rear console vents and floor vents.

Air flows from the rear floor vents.

Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 19

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P239)

 

Audio system (P240)

Models with color audio system (P247)

(Day/Night) Button

Audio/Information Screen

RADIO Button

(Phone) Button

(Sound) Button

MEDIA Button

VOL / (Volume/Power)

Selector Knob

Knob

MENU/CLOCK Button

(Back) Button

/

(Skip/Seek) Buttons

Preset Buttons (1-6)

20

Models with Display Audio (P 265)

 

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

 

(Home) Icon

(Back) Icon

(Day/Night) Icon

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Audio/Information Screen

Models with Blu-rayTM player

Disc Slot

(Eject) Button

Quick Reference Guide

21

Quick Reference Guide

Audio Remote Controls

(P244)

Models with color audio system

/ Buttons

(+ / (- Bar

SOURCE

Button

+ / – Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.

SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM1/FM2/AM/USB/iPod/

Bluetooth® Audio/AUX

/ Buttons
Radio: Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.

USB device/Bluetooth® Audio:

Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.

Models with Display Audio

 

3 / 4 / / Buttons

(+ / (- Bar

ENTER Button

+ / – Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.

3 / 4 / / /ENTER Buttons Press 3 or 4 to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver information interface, and then press the ENTER button.
Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio mode as follows:

Android Auto/Apple CarPlay/SiriusXM®*/ Rear Entertainment*/AUX Input/AM/ Bluetooth® Audio/Social Playlist/FM/My Honda Music/USB/iPod/CD*

Radio: Press / to change the preset station.

CD*/USB device/My Honda Music/ Bluetooth® Audio:

Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song.

22

Driving (P503)

 

Automatic Transmission (P530)

Select (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Gear selection
Gear Position Indicator

The gear position indicator and the shift button indicator indicate the current gear selection.

Gear Position Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

Shift Button

Indicator

Intelligent Traction

Management Button

Park

Press the (P button.

Used when parking or before turning off or starting the engine. Transmission is locked.

Reverse

Pull back the (R button.

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Press the (N button.

Transmission is not locked.

Drive/S Position

Each time you press the D/S button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode. Used for:

Drive

Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 9th automatically)
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
S Position

Automatically changing gears between 1st and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed)
Driving in the sequential mode
* Not available on all models 23

Paddle Shifters (P537)

Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual transmission (1st through 9th). This is useful for engine braking.
Quick Reference Guide

Gear Position Indicator

M (sequential

mode)

Indicator

Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator

When the transmission is in (D

The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.
When the transmission is in (S

Holds the selected gear, and the M (sequential mode) indicator comes on.
The sequential mode gear selection is shown in the instrument panel.
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+

Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter

24

(P555, 700)

VSA® On and Off (P547)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
CMBSTM On and Off

(P565)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist

 

The TPMS monitors tire pressure.
TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
TPMS fill assist provides audible and visual guidance during tire pressure adjustment.
Refueling (P621)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)

a Press the fuel fill door release button.

b After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

Quick Reference Guide

25

Honda Sensing®(P559)

 

Quick Reference Guide

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

The camera is located

behind the rearview

mirror.

Front Sensor

Camera

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is

behind the emblem.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P562)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) (P574)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P587)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

(P596)

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

26

Maintenance (P625)

 

Under the Hood (P635)

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

Wiper Blades (P652)

fluid. Add when necessary.

● Replace blades if they leave streaks

● Check brake fluid.

across the windshield or become noisy.

● Check the battery condition monthly.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

Tires (P656)

Lights (P647)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

Check tire pressures regularly.
Install snow tires for winter
driving.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

Quick Reference Guide

27

Handling the Unexpected (P679)

 

Quick Reference Guide

Flat Tire (P681)

Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire located under the cargo area.
Engine Won’t Start (P689)

If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Overheating (P695)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Indicators Come On (P697)

Blown Fuse (P701)

Emergency Towing (P706)

● Identify the indicator and consult the

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical

● Call a professional towing service if you

owner’s manual.

device does not operate.

need to tow your vehicle.

28

What to Do If

 

Canadian models

The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?

The steering wheel may be locked.
Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Quick Reference Guide

Why does the brake pedal This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a

pulsate slightly when problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

applying the brakes? pump the brake pedal.

uAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P606)

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle.

To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.

29

Quick Reference Guide

Why do the doors lock

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

after I unlocked the doors?

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

driver’s door?

The exterior lights are left on.

The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

 

Models with walk away auto lock®

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.

uLocking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

(P144)

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when:

sound when I start driving? ● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

The parking brake pedal is not fully released.
30

Why do I hear a screeching The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

 

sound when I apply the inspected by a dealer.

brake pedal?

Quick

Why does the gear position automatically change to P when I open the driver’s door to check for parking space lines when reversing?

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
Close the driver’s door and manually change the gear position.
uWhen opening the driver’s door (P533)

Reference Guide

I’m seeing an amber

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention.

indicator of a tire with an

Check tire pressure.

exclamation point. What is

uIf the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator

that?

Comes On or Blinks (P700)

31

This page intentionally left blank.

32

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Airbags

Child Safety

Important Safety Precautions…………..

34

Airbag System Components……………

47

Protecting Child Passengers ……………

62

Important Handling Information………

36

Types of Airbags …………………………..

50

Safety of Infants and Small Children ..

64

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features…………

37

Front Airbags (SRS) ……………………….

50

Safety of Larger Children ……………….

76

Safety Checklist ……………………………

38

Side Airbags…………………………………

55

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Seat Belts

Side Curtain Airbags ……………………..

57

Carbon Monoxide Gas…………………..

78

About Your Seat Belts ……………………

39

Airbag System Indicators………………..

58

Safety Labels

Fastening a Seat Belt ……………………..

42

Airbag Care …………………………………

61

Label Locations …………………………….

79

Seat Belt Inspection……………………….

46

33

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

 

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

 

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

34

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

 

Safe Driving

35

For Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving

 

Important Handling Information

 

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information

 

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
P. 528

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 520 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
36

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

9

8

9

6

10

7

8

7

10

11

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

6

Seat Belts

7

Front Airbags

8

Side Airbags

9

Side Curtain Airbags

10

Door Locks

11

Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

Safe Driving

 

37

For Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving

 

Safety Checklist

 

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 194

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions P. 200

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height, and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 62

1Safety Checklist

 

If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 97
38

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

 

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All seven or eight seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passenger’s, second row and third row seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 71
1About Your Seat Belts

 

WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 39

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:

All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Seat Belt Reminder
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts.

 

If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound, and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the

indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving

until the seat belt is fastened.

1About Your Seat Belts

 

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.

The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

Protecting Child Passengers P. 62
40

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

 

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Safe Driving

 

41

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

Fastening a Seat Belt

 

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

Adjusting the Seats P. 194
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

 

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in.

Latch

 

Plate

Buckle

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

Then smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

About Your Seat Belts P. 39
Seat Belt Inspection P. 46
42

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

Lap belt

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

as low as

possible

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

 

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

Move the anchor up and down while

holding the release button.

Push

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests

Push

across the center of your chest and over

your shoulder.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 43

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

 

Safe Driving

Small Latch Plate

 

Latch Plate

 

Small Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle

 

Second row bench seat

Latch Plate

Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.
Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.

Latch Plate

Small Latch Plate

Buckle

44

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

 

Third row seat

Latch Plate

Buckle

Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

 

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:

When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving

 

45

Seat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving

 

Seat Belt Inspection

 

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly, and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

 

WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

46

Airbags

Airbag System Components

 

8 10 9 8 7

12

6

8

8

Safe Driving

 

8

11

Continued 47

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving

 

The front, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

fDriver’s seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver’s seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

hImpact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.

jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

kSafing Sensor

lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

48

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

 

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

Safe Driving

 

49

AirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Types of Airbags

 

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

 

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system.

Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Types of Airbags

 

The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

50

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

 

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

1How the Front Airbags Work

 

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Safe Driving

 

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued 51

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection.

When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

52

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

1Advanced Airbags

 

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a

 

Driver’s

 

Seat

Position

Sensor

The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position or passenger’s occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Indicator P. 58

SafeDriving

Continued 53

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

Passenger’s

 

Seat

Weight

Sensors

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger’s airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
1Advanced Airbags

 

For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:

• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is

not excessively reclined.

• The occupant is not leaning against the door or

center console.

• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front

of them.

• There are no objects hanging from the front

passenger’s seat.

• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back

pocket.

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard

are not obstructed by any object.

• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

• There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat-back.

• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger’s seat.

• There are no objects placed under or beside the

front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned

objects can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is

hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly

placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag

sensors.

• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
Floor Mats P. 673
54

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags

 

The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-backs.

 

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing

Location

1Side Airbags

 

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Safe Driving

 

Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

Continued 55

AirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving

 

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

56

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags

 

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags

 

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Safe Driving

 

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

 

The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

 

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

Continued 57

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving

 

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

Airbag System Indicators

 

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

 

WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

58

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
■ When the passenger airbag off

U.S.

Canada

indicator comes on

 

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

Child Safety P. 62
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on. If the indicator is on in the event of a crash, the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.

If the front passenger’s seat is empty, the passenger’s airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:

The occupant is sitting in an upright position, wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
Safe Driving

 

Continued 59

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate

the passenger’s airbag.

If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set

forth in the above bullet points on the previous page

are met.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:

All of the above conditions are met, and the indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is on.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front

seat when the indicator is on.

60

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care

 

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

 

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

 

61

Child Safety

Safe Driving

 

Protecting Child Passengers

 

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a

child sitting in the front seat.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle.

• Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

62

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Safety Labels P. 79
Safe Driving

 

63

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system.

Airbags P. 47
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

1Protecting Infants

 

WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position.

The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

64

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Smaller Children

 

WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Safe Driving

 

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and

follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Continued 65

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat

 

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

66

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in the marked second and third row seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Second row bench seat

 

Marks

 

Second row captain seat

Marks

Safe Driving

 

Continued 67

 

Safe Driving

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Third row seat

Marks

Lower Anchors

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

Rigid Type

object.

 

Lower Anchors

Flexible Type

68

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Second row bench seat

 

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Second row seat outer positions

 

Put the outer head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Third row seat outer positions

 

Route the tether strap hook between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Center position

Put the center head restraint to its lowest position, then route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 69

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Second row captain seat

 

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

 

Third row seat

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

All positions

 

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 62

70

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

 

4. Let the seat belt if it is completely retracted it unlocks wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked.

u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 71

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 62

 

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

72

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether

 

Second row bench seat

 

Tether Anchor Points

 

A tether anchor point is provided behind each second and third row seating position. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors.

Safe Driving

 

Second row captain seat

Tether Anchor Points

 

Third row seat

Tether Anchor Points

Continued 73

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Second row bench seat

 

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

 

Second row captain seat

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Using a second row anchor
Outer positions

Put the outer head restraint to its upper-most position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
Center position

Put the center head restraint to its lowest position, then route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
All positions

 

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
74

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Third row seat

 

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Using a third row anchor
Route the tether strap hook between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Open the anchor cover.
Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Safe Driving

 

75

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist

• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat?

• Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child’s neck and arm?

• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

• Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

 

WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

76

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations.

 

Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

1Booster Seats

 

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

Safe Driving

 

77

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Safe Driving

 

Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

• The exhaust system may have been damaged.

• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

78

Safety Labels

Label Locations

 

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

 

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

Safe

for a replacement.

Driving

Sun Visor

Canadian models

Sun Visor

U.S. models

U.S. models only

Dashboard

U.S. models only

Air Conditioner System

U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

79

 

This page intentionally left blank.

80

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators 82

Driver Information Interface Warning and

Information Messages 97

Gauges and Displays

Gauges 110

Driver Information Interface 111

81

 

Instrument Panel

Indicators

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

• Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Make sure

you set the power mode to ON,

the parking brake is released. Check the

then goes off if the parking brake

brake fluid level.

U.S.

has been released.

2 What to do when the indicator

• Comes on when the parking brake

comes on while driving P. 699

Parking Brake

is applied, and goes off when it is

Comes on along with the ABS

released.

indicator – Have your vehicle checked

and Brake

Canada

Comes on when the brake fluid

by a dealer.

System Indicator

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

(Red)

level is low.

Comes on if there is a problem

Comes On P. 699

(Red)

with the brake system.

The beeper sounds and the

indicator comes on if you drive

with the parking brake not fully

released.

U.S.

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your

U.S.

you set the power mode to ON,

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Parking Brake

then goes off.

With this indicator on, your vehicle still

Comes on if there is a problem

has normal braking ability.

and Brake

Canada

with a system related to braking

System Indicator

Canada

other than the conventional brake

(Amber)

system.

(Amber)

 

82

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when you set the

• Readiness codes are part of the on board

power mode to ON, and goes off

diagnostics for the emissions control

when the engine starts, or after

systems.

several seconds if the engine did

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 717

not start. If “readiness codes”

Comes on while driving – Have your

Malfunction

have not been set, it blinks five

vehicle checked by a dealer.

times before it goes off.

Blinks while driving – Stop in a safe

Indicator Lamp

• Comes on if there is a problem

place where there are no flammable

with the emissions control system.

objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes

• Blinks when a misfire in the

or more, and wait for it to cool down.

engine’s cylinders is detected.

Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Comes On or Blinks P. 698

Comes on when you set the

• Comes on while driving – Turn off the

Charging System

power mode to ON, and goes off

climate control system and rear defogger

when the engine starts.

in order to reduce electricity

Indicator

Comes on when the battery is not

consumption.

charging.

2 If the Charging System Indicator

Comes On P. 697

Gear Position

Indicates the current gear

2 Shifting P. 530

Indicator

selection.

M (sequential

Comes on when the manual

mode) Indicator/

sequential shift mode is applied.

Sequential Mode

2 Sequential Mode P. 536

Gear Selection

Indicator

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 83

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

The indicated current gear selection

Avoid sudden start and acceleration, and

blinks if there is a problem with the

stop in a safe place immediately.

transmission system.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

All the gear positions may light for

When all the gear positions light,

several seconds, and go off.

immediately stop your vehicle in a safe

place.

Indicators go off if there is no problem.

However, even if they go off, take your

vehicle to a dealer for inspection.

Transmission

The indicated current gear selection

Immediately stop in a safe place.

System

or all the gear positions blink if

2 Emergency Towing P. 706

Indicator

there is a problem with the

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

transmission system, and the

vehicle no longer moves.

The indicated current gear selection

The engine can be activated as a

or all the gear positions blink if you

temporary measure.

cannot select (P due to the

2 If the Transmission System

transmission system failure.

Indicator Blinks along with the

Warning Message P. 700

Set the parking brake when parking.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

84

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on and the beeper sounds

• The beeper stops and the indicator goes

if you are not wearing a seat belt

off when you and the front passenger

when you set the power mode to

fasten their seat belts.

ON.

Stays on after you and/or the front

Seat Belt

• If the front passenger is not

passenger has fastened the seat

wearing a seat belt, the indicator

belt(s) – A detection error may have

Reminder

comes on a few seconds later.

occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle

Indicator

• Blinks while driving if either you

checked by a dealer.

and/or the front passenger has not

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 40

fastened a seat belt. The beeper

sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

• Comes on when the fuel reserve is

Comes on – Refuel your vehicle as soon

Low Fuel

running low (approximately 2.5

as possible.

U.S. gal./9.5 liter left).

Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a

Indicator

• Blinks if there is a problem with

dealer.

the fuel gauge.

• Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your

Anti-lock Brake

you set the power mode to ON,

vehicle checked by a dealer. With this

System (ABS)

then goes off.

indicator on, your vehicle still has normal

Indicator

If it comes on at any other time,

braking ability but no anti-lock function.

there is a problem with the ABS.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 606

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 85

Indicatorsu
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly or does not come

you set the power mode to ON,

on at all – Have your vehicle checked by

Supplemental

then goes off.

a dealer.

Comes on if a problem with any of

Instrument

Restraint System

the following is detected:

Indicator

– Side curtain airbag system

– Supplemental restraint system

– Side airbag system

Panel

– Seat belt tensioner

• Comes on for a few seconds when

you set the power mode to ON,

Auto High-Beam

then goes off.

2 Auto High-Beam P. 179

Indicator

Comes on when all the operating

conditions of the Auto high-beam

are met.

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

you set the power mode to ON,

checked by a dealer.

then goes off.

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®),

Vehicle Stability

Blinks when VSA®, or trailer

aka Electronic Stability Control

stability assist is active.

(ESC), System P. 546

AssistTM (VSA®)

2 Trailer Stability Assist P. 517

System Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

2 Hill start assist system P. 527

with the VSA®, hill start assist,

When Trailer Stability Assist Problem

trailer stability assist or brake

is displayed on the driver information

lighting system.

interface, the VSA® does not activate.

 

86

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

you set the power mode to ON,

then goes off.

Comes on when VSA® OFF switch

Appears when Normal or Snow mode is

is pressed.

selected.

2

VSA® On and Off P. 547

Vehicle Stability

Appears when Mud mode is selected.

AWD models

AssistTM (VSA®)

Comes on when Mud/Sand mode

2

Intelligent Traction Management*

OFF Indicator

is selected by pressing Intelligent

P. 544

Traction Management System

Appears when Sand mode is selected.

switch.

2

Intelligent Traction Management*

P. 544

Appears when Mud or Sand mode is

AWD models

Comes on when VSA® OFF switch

selected.

is pressed.

2

VSA® On and Off P. 547

Comes on when you set the

Stays on constantly or does not

Electric Power

power mode to ON, and goes off

come on at all – Have your vehicle

Steering (EPS)

when the engine starts.

checked by a dealer.

System Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

2

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)

with the EPS system.

System Indicator Comes On P. 699

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 87

Indicatorsu
Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

• Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Stop in a

you set the power mode to ON,

safe place, check tire pressures, and

then goes off.

inflate the tire(s) if necessary.

Comes on if the tire pressure of

Low Tire

any of the tires becomes

significantly low.

Pressure/TPMS

Indicator

Blinks for about one minute, and

Blinks and remains on – Have your

then stays on if there is a problem

vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle

with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist,

is fitted with a compact spare, get your

or when a compact spare tire is

regular tire repaired or replaced and put

temporarily installed.

back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Blinks when you operate the turn

Does not blink or blinks rapidly

Turn Signal and

signal lever.

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 649, 650

Hazard Warning

Blink along with all turn signals

Indicators

when you press the hazard

warning button.

High Beam

Comes on when the high beam

Indicator

headlights are on.

Comes on whenever the light

If you set the power mode to

Lights On

switch is on, or in AUTO when the

ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF while the

Indicator

exterior lights are on.

exterior lights are on, a chime sounds

when the driver’s door is opened.

 

88

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Fog Light

Comes on when the fog lights are

on.

Indicator*

Comes on briefly when you set the

Blinks – You cannot start the engine. Set

power mode to ON, then goes off.

the power mode to VEHICLE OFF*1, then

Indicator

• Blinks if the immobilizer system

select the ON mode again.

cannot recognize the key

Repeatedly blinks – The system may be

Immobilizer

information.

malfunctioning. Have your vehicle

System Indicator

checked by a dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it. Electrical

problems can occur.

Indicator

• Comes on briefly when you set the

power mode to ON, then goes off.

Security System

Blinks when the security system

2 Security System Alarm P. 163

Alarm Indicator

alarm has been set.

*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 89

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on along with a beep• While the indicator is on, press the
when a problem is detected. A(home) button, select Warnings, then

system message on the driver

press the ENTER button to see the

information interface appears at

message again.

System

the same time.

• Refer to the Indicators information in this

chapter when a system message appears

Message

on the driver information interface. Take

Indicator

the appropriate action for the message.

• The driver information interface does not

return to the normal screen unless the

warning is canceled, or the ENTER

button is pressed repeatedly.

Econ Mode

• Comes on when the Econ mode is

2 ECON Mode P. 543

on.

Indicator

Comes on when pressing the

2WD models

Intelligent Traction Management

Intelligent

button.

Traction

2 Intelligent Traction Management*

*1 Management

P. 544

AWD models

Indicator*

*1

*1:AWD models

* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Auto Idle Stop

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is

in operation. The engine

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 538

Indicator (Green)

automatically shuts off.

Comes on for a few seconds when

you set the power mode to ON,

then goes off.

Auto Idle Stop

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop

2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

System Indicator

system has been turned off by the

P. 539

(Amber)

Auto Idle Stop OFF button.

Blinks if there is a problem with

Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a

the Auto Idle Stop system.

dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – The engine drives

you set the power mode to ON,

the front wheels only in this state. Have

then goes off.

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if there is a problem

Blinks while driving – Stop in a safe

All-wheel drive

with the AWD system.

place, change to (P, and idle the engine

(AWD)

Blinks when the differential

until the indicator goes off. If the

Indicator*

temperature is too high.

indicator does not stop blinking, take

your vehicle to a dealer.

2 Intelligent Variable Torque

Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD

System* P. 554

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 91

Indicatorsu
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Lane Keeping

Comes on for a few seconds when

• Stays on constantly – Have your

you set the power mode to ON,

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Assist System

then goes off.

(LKAS) Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

(Amber)

with the LKAS.

Instrument

Lane Keeping

Comes on when you press the

Assist System

MAIN button.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Panel

(LKAS) Indicator

P. 587

(Green)

 

92

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your

you change the power mode to

vehicle checked by a dealer.

ON, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem

with the RDM system.

Comes on when the RDM system

Stays on – The temperature inside the

shuts itself off.

camera is too high.

Use the climate control system to cool

down the camera.

Road Departure

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

Mitigation

down.

(RDM) Indicator

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Stays on – The area around the camera

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off

with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator and message come back on

after you cleaned the area around the

camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 93

Indicatorsu
Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Adaptive Cruise

• Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Have your

you set the power mode to ON,

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Control (ACC)

then goes off.

Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

(Amber)

with ACC.

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on when you press the

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Control (ACC)

MAIN button.

P. 574

Indicator (Green)

• Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly without the

Collision

you change the power mode to

CMBSTM off – Have your vehicle checked

ON, then goes off.

by a dealer.

Mitigation

Comes on when you deactivate

2 Collision Mitigation Braking

Braking

the CMBSTM. A driver information

SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 562

SystemTM

interface message appears for five

(CMBSTM)

seconds.

Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

with the CMBSTM.

 

94

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the CMBSTM

Stays on – The temperature inside the

shuts itself off.

camera is too high. Use the climate

control system to cool down the camera.

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Stays on – The area around the camera

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

Collision

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off

with a soft cloth.

Mitigation

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Braking

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

SystemTM

the indicator does not go off even after

(CMBSTM)

you cleaned the camera.

Indicator

The area around the radar sensor is

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off

with a soft cloth. Indicator may take

some time to go off after the radar

sensor is cleaned.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator does not go off even after

you clean the sensor cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 603

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 95

 

Instrument Panel

Indicatorsu
Models with Blind spot information System

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Stays on while blind spot

information system is turned off.

Blind spot

• Comes on when mud, snow, or ice

• Comes on while driving – Remove the

accumulates in the vicinity of

obstacle in the vicinity of the sensor.

information

sensor.

2 Blind spot information System*

System Indicator

P. 549

Comes on if there is a problem• Comes on while driving – Have your
with the system.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

 

The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the ENTER button to see the message again with the system message indicator on.

Message

Condition

Explanation

• Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely

Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

closed.

Appears when the hood is opened.

Close the hood.

PanelInstrument

Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.

• Appears while driving – Immediately stop in a safe

place.

2

If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 697

Appears when the washer fluid is low*.

• Refill the washer fluid.

2

Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 646

Models with color audio system

• Appears while you are customizing the settings and

2

Vehicle Customization P. 125

the transmission is in other than (P.

 

* Not available on all models Continued 97

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the temperature of the transmission

Until the message disappears, reduce your speed and

is starting to get too hot.

allow the system to cool down.

The performance of the vehicle may be reduced.

Appears if the battery charge becomes low.

Charge the battery.

Instrument

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Panel

the battery.

2 Checking the Battery P. 665

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due

soon.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver

Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and

Information Interface P. 631

Maintenance Past Due follow.

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.

2 Overheating P. 695

98

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Manually open or close the power tailgate.

U.S.

Models with power tailgate

• Appears when there is a problem with the power

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

tailgate system.

Canada

U.S.

• Appears when the starter system has a problem.

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE

START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while

pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Canada

Canadian models

• Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

• Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 99

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the

• Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

power mode is in ACCESSORY.

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 171

Appears when you close the door with the power • Disappears when you bring the remote back inside the
mode in ON without the remote inside the vehicle.

vehicle and close the door.

2

Keyless Remote Reminder P. 173

Appears when the remote battery becomes weak.

• Replace the battery as soon as possible.

2

Replacing the Remote Battery P. 667

• Appears if the remote battery is too weak to start the

• Bring the remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP

engine or the key is not within operating range to

button to be touched with.

start the engine.

2

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 690

A beeper sounds six times.

Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP

button while the vehicle is moving.

2

Emergency Engine Stop P. 691

Appears three seconds after the To Start, Hold

Unless you bring the keyless remote in front of the

Remote Near Start Button, then To Start Engine

ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not

messages appeared sequentially.

appear.

2

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 690

• Appears if there is a problem with the cooling

Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your

system.

vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

100

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.

• Appears while driving – The headlights may not be

on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

• Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with

Models with parking sensor system

Instrument

• Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor

mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on or the

system.

beeper does not stop even after you clean the area,

have the system checked by a dealer.

• Check for obstacles near your vehicle to make sure it is

Panel

Models with parking sensor system

• Appears if there are obstacles around the sensors.

safe to park.

• Appears constantly – Have your vehicle checked by a

Models with keyless access system

• Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the

dealer.

keyless access system.

• Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the push

• Appears constantly – Have your vehicle checked by a

button starting system.

dealer.

• Appears if there is a problem with the Auto high-

• Manually operate the headlight switch.

beam.

• If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when

this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Appears when the area around the camera is• Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe comes back on after you cleaned the area around the

place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. camera.

• May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,

snow, fog, etc.)

Continued 101

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

• Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with

• Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply

a vehicle in front of you.

the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

2

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

P. 562

Instrument

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

Appears when ACC has been automatically

You can resume the set speed after the condition that

canceled.

caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+

Panel

button.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC cannot be set.

vehicle is moving, and the brake pedal is depressed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

• Appears if the VSA® or traction control function

ACC has been automatically canceled.

operates while ACC is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high

Reduce the speed, then set ACC.

for you to set ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive

Reduce the speed, then reset ACC.

vehicle speed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

• Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low for

Raise the speed, then set ACC.

you to set ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

 

102

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

• Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive low

• Raise the speed, then reset ACC.

vehicle speed.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 574

• Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

• Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 587

lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

• Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

• Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 596

lane.

• You can change the setting for the road departure

mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only

When you selected Warning Only

can be selected.

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the

Models with color audio system

vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

2 Vehicle Customization P. 125

When you selected Normal or Wide

Models with Display Audio

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the

2 Customized Features P. 429

vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system

also steers the vehicle to help you remain within

your driving lane.

• Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper

• Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

sounds simultaneously.

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 103

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

• Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS

• If any other system indicators come on, such as the

button is pressed, but there is a problem with a

VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.

system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels

2 Indicators P. 82

automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if

Instrument

selected by customization.

• Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too

Use the climate control system to cool down the

high and some driver assist systems cannot be

camera.

Panel

activated.

Disappears – The camera has been cooled down and

the systems are activated normally.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

• Appears if the area around the front sensor camera

• When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from

a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

detecting a vehicle in front.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,

does not disappear even after you cleaned the area

snow, fog, etc.)

around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a

and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in

safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The

front.

message may take some time to go off.

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

snow, fog, etc.)

does not disappear even after you clean the sensor

cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 603

 

104

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the transmission system temperature

Stop in a safe place in (P.

is too high. The vehicle does not operate properly.

Let the engine idle until the message disappears.

Appears when you set the power mode to

2 Starting the Engine P. 522

Instrument

automatically due to the following reason:

2 Starting the Engine P. 522

ACCESSORY or ON.

• Appears when the engine does not restart

Follow the normal procedure to start the engine.

The hood is open.

Panel

There is a problem in the system that disables Auto

Idle Stop.

Appears when you attempt to change to another

• To select another gear position while in (P, the engine

gear position with the transmission in (P and the

must be ON.

engine OFF.

• Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while

• Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake,

driving.

then restart the engine. If the message disappears,

continue driving.

Appears when you try to change the gear position

Press the park button if you leave the vehicle.

after the position has automatically been changed to

(P with the driver’s door open and the driver’s seat

belt unfastened.

 

Continued 105

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

• Appears if the vehicle is stationary and the

Press the (P button before releasing the brake pedal

transmission is put into (N, the driver’s seatbelt is

when idling, parking or exiting the vehicle.

unfastened, and the brake pedal is released, as there

2 Shift Operation P. 532

is a risk that the vehicle might roll unexpectedly.

Instrument

Appears when the engine stops without the

If you want to set the power mode to ON, change the

transmission in (P, and does not restart

gear position to (P.

automatically.

• If you want to start the engine, follow the normal

Panel

Appears if you open the hood while Auto Idle Stop

procedure.

activates.

2 Starting the Engine P. 522

Appears when you change to (N, then release the

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N

(N button.

position [car wash mode] P. 534

Appears when you press and hold (N button for

Disappears when you set the gear position to other

more than two seconds.

than (N.

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N

position [car wash mode] P. 534

• Appears when car wash mode is not available due to

• When transmission is too hot, car wash mode may not

hot transmission.

be available. Let the engine idle and cool down

transmission.

2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N

position [car wash mode] P. 534

Appears when you try to change the gear position • Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button. without depressing the brake pedal.
106

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

• Appears when you try to change the gear position

• Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select

without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

a shift button.

Appears when the (P button is pressed while the

• Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before

vehicle is reversing.

operating the select button.

Instrument

vehicle is moving.

Appears if you change the gear position to (R while

the vehicle is moving forward, or to (D while the

Appears when you set the power mode to ON

• Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.

Panel

without fastening the driver’s seat belt.

2 Shift Operation P. 532

Appears when you change the gear position after

(P has been automatically selected with the driver’s

door open, the driver’s seat belt unfastened, then

the brake pedal is released.

Appears when you press the (P button but it is not

• Depress the brake pedal until this message disappear.

engaged due to low ATF temperature.

Appears when depressing the accelerator pedal• Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. When
while the gear position is in (N.

driving, depress the brake pedal and change the gear

position.

Continued 107

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance

Screens*1 or Auto Idle Stop Display ON*2 has

been selected from the customization menu.

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 538

2 Vehicle Customization P. 125

2 Customized Features P. 429

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate for

some reason.

Appears when the engine restarts automatically.

Appears when the battery temperature is around

14°F (−10°C) or lower.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate

because the climate control system is in use, and the

2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 539

difference between the set temperature and actual

interior temperature becomes significant.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate

because the engine coolant temperature is too low

or high.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate

because the battery charge level is low.

Appears when Auto Idle Stop does not activate

• Depress the brake pedal firmly.

because the pressure to the brake pedal is not

enough.

 

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

108

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance

Screens*1 or Auto Idle Stop Display ON*2 has

been selected from the customization menu.

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 538

2 Vehicle Customization P. 125

2 Customized Features P. 429

Appears when the system is under the following

● The engine restarts automatically in a few seconds.

conditions while Auto Idle Stop activates:

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 538

– The climate control system is in use, and the

2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When P. 541

difference between the set temperature and actual

interior temperature becomes significant.

– The humidity in the interior is high.

– The battery charge level is low.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

Models with remote engine starter

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s

door while the engine is running by remote engine

2 Remote Engine Start* P. 524

start.

 

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models 109

Gauges and Displays

Instrument Panel

 

Gauges

 

Gauges include the fuel gauge, temperature gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is set to ON.

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

1Fuel Gauge

 

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.

Overheating P. 695
110

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

Driver Information Interface

 

The driver information interface displays the speedometer, tachometer, odometer, trip computer, outside temperature, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

1Speedometer

You can set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either mph or km/h.

2 Units P. 120

 

1Tachometer

You can turn on or off the tachometer display.

2 Show Tachometer P. 124

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 111

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Odometer
Instrument

Odometer

Panel

Outside Temperature

 

Outside Temperature

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display

Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Use the driver information interface* or audio/ information screen* to correct the temperature.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

 

Customized Features P. 429
1Outside Temperature

 

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

* Not available on all models
Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Accessing Content
Press the (home) button, then press the 3 / 4 button to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the ENTER button to see detailed information.

1Accessing Content

 

To go back to the previous screen, press the *1/ *2 (back) button.

You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using the driver information interface.

Arrange Apps P. 123
Show/Hide Apps P. 122
Instrument Panel

 

*1: Models with color audio system

*2: Models with Display Audio

Continued 113

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

Models with color audio system

3 / 4 Button

(Home) Button

Models with Display Audio

3 / 4 Button

(Home) Button

Press 3 or 4.

117
P. 122

P. 115

*

P. 119

*

P. 119

*

P. 117

*

P. 121

120
P. 123

P. 118

*

P. 120

* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

Trip Computer
Press the ENTER button to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.

 

Trip Computer A

Models with color audio system

Trip Computer B

ENTER Button

Models with Display Audio

ENTER Button

Distance

Average Fuel

Economy

Range

Instant Fuel

Economy

ENTER

Instrument Panel

Continued 115

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Distance
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting distance

To reset the Distance, display it and then press and hold the ENTER button until the Distance is reset to 0.0.

Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each Distance in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a Distance is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Instant fuel economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

1Distance

Switch between Distance A and Distance B by pressing the ENTER button.

 

1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)

You can change when the average fuel economy is reset.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 429
116

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Navigation

Models with Display Audio

 

Display Audio shows you turn-by-turn directions to your destination.

Models with navigation system

 

Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions When the navigation system is not providing driving guidance, an image of a compass appears in the driver information interface.

Refer to the navigation system
Compass

Warnings
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 97

1Navigation

 

Models with Display Audio

Turn-by-turn directions will be shown on the driver information interface only when your android phone is connected to Android AutoTM.

You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.

Customized Features P. 429
1Warnings

The Warnings app is dynamic and will only appear when there are active warnings. If there are no Warnings, this app will not be shown.

Instrument Panel

 

(Example)

Continued 117

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Maintenance

Instrument Panel

 

Shows the current condition of the tire

pressure and the remaining oil life.

Tire Pressure
Shows the tire pressure of each tire.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist P. 555
Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance

MinderTM.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 629
118

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
AWD Torque*
The indicators on the display show the

 

amount of torque being transferred to the

right front, left front, right rear, and left rear

wheels.

Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System* P. 554
Phone*
Shows the current phone information.

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 476
Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 119

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Units
Enables you to set the speedometer and the

 

displayed measurements to read in either mph

or km/h.

Press and hold the ENTER button. Each time

you do this, the unit will change from mph to

km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation

screen will appear for a few seconds.

Now Playing*
Shows the current audio information.

 

Audio System Basic Operation P. 265
* Not available on all models
Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Audio Source*
Shows the current audio source.

 

2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 265

(Example)

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 121

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Show/Hide Apps
You can show or hide the meter contents.

Shown Select the content you wish to show or hide, then press the ENTER button.

 

u Repeat it if you want to show or hide more than one app.

Press ENTER

1Show/Hide Apps

 

You cannot hide apps with the icon on the right side.

Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization does not restore these settings to their original state.

Models with Display Audio

You can also add the Android Auto, Apple

CarPlay, Sirius XM*, My Honda Music, USB, AM, FM, Bluetooth Audio, Social Playlist, AUX Input, CD* and Rear Entertainment* apps.

Hidden

* Not available on all models
Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Settings
Change the settings to your liking.

 

Arrange Apps
You can change the order of the apps on the home screen.

Press the 3 / 4 button to select Arrange Apps, then press the ENTER button.
Press the 3 / 4 button to select the icon you want to move, then press the ENTER button.
Press the 3 / 4 button repeatedly to move the icon to your desired position, then press the ENTER button.

1Arrange Apps

 

Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization does not restore these settings to their original state.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 123

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Show Tachometer
You can show or hide the tachometer.

Press the 3 / 4 button to select Show

 

Tachometer, then press the ENTER button. u The tachometer appears when the check

box is checked.

1Show Tachometer

 

Selecting Default All in Vehicle Customization does not restore these settings to their original state.

124

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Models with color audio system

 

Vehicle Customization
Use the driver information interface to customize certain vehicle features.

How to customize

First, make sure the vehicle is at a complete stop and that the power mode is set to

ON. Next, press the (home) button, then press the 3 / 4 button to select Settings. Finally, press the ENTER button.

 

1Vehicle Customization

 

To customize other features, press the 3/ 4 button.

List of customizable options P. 128
Example of how to customize a setting P. 131
Change to (P before you attempt to change a customized setting.

Instrument

 

3 / 4 Button

Scroll through the menu or items.

Button

Goes back to the previous screen.

Driver Information Interface:

Goes to Settings.

ENTER Button

Enters the selected

item.

Button

Goes to home

screen.

Panel

Continued 125

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Customization flow
Press the (home) button.

 

Settings

ENTER

3

4

 

Arrange Apps

P. 123

P. 124

Show Tachometer

 

Instrument Panel

ENTER

 

3

4

 

Vehicle Customization

ENTER

Meter Setup

ENTER

3

4

3

4

 

Driver Assist System

3

ENTER

Setup

4

3

4

Lighting Setup

ENTER

3

4

3

4

 

Language Selection

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Alarm Volume

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Auto Engine Idle Stop Guidance Screens

Forward Collision Warning Distance

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

126

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

ENTER

3

4

3

4

Door Setup

3

4

Default All

3

4

Exit

ENTER

 

3

 

4

Auto Door Lock

 

Auto Door Unlock

 

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

 

Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 127

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable settings

Language Selection

Changes the displayed language.

English*1/Français/Español

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how the distance and

When Fully Refueled/

average fuel economy of trip computer A is reset.

IGN OFF/Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how the distance and

When Fully Refueled/

average fuel economy of trip computer B is reset.

IGN OFF/Manually Reset*1

Meter Setup

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the volume setting for buzzers, warnings,

High/Mid*1/Low

turn signals, and other alerting systems.

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Auto Engine Idle Stop

Turns the engine idle-stop guidance displayed in the

meter display on and off during the auto engine idle-

ON/OFF*1

Guidance Screens

stop system is in operation.

Forward Collision

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Warning Distance

Driver Assist

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

ON/OFF*1

Detect Beep

vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.

System

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure

Setup

Normal*1/Wide/Warning Only

Mitigation Setting

mitigation system.

Lane Keeping Assist

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is

ON/OFF*1

Suspend Beep

suspended.

*1:Default Setting

128

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable settings

Interior Light

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Dimming Time

after you close the doors.

Headlight Auto OFF

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

Lighting

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Setup

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

Illumination

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Sensitivity

AUTO position.

Auto Headlight ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when

the headlights automatically come on while the

ON*1/OFF

With Wiper ON

headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

 

*1:Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 129

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable settings

Auto Door Lock

Changes the setting for when the doors

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift

automatically lock.

From P/OFF

All Doors When Driver’s Door

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors

Opens*1/All Doors When

automatically unlock.

Shifted To Park/All Doors When

Ignition Switched OFF/OFF

Door Setup

Key And Remote

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Unlock Mode

on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK – The exterior lights flash.

ON*1/OFF

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and

Security Relock Timer

the security system to set after you unlock the

90sec/60sec/30sec*1

vehicle without opening a door.

Default All

Cancels customized changes you have made or

Cancel/Set

restores them to their default setting.

*1:Default Setting

130

Example of how to customize a setting
Below are steps that explain how to change the reset timing for trip A from the default setting (manual) so that it resets automatically when the vehicle is fully refueled.

Press the (home) button and then the 3 / 4 button to select Settings, then press the ENTER button.
Press the 3 / 4 button to select Vehicle Customization, then press the ENTER button.

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

Continued 131

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Press the 3 / 4 button to select Meter Setup, then press the ENTER button.
u Language Selection appears first in the display.

Press the 3 / 4 button to select “Trip A” Reset Timing, then press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Fully Refueled, IGN OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit.

Press the 3 / 4 button to select When Fully Refueled, then press the ENTER button.
u The SETUP “When Fully Refueled” screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

 

132

Gauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
Press the 3 / 4 button until Exit appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
Repeat Step 6 until you return to the Vehicle Customization screen, then press
the (home) or (back) button to return to the home screen.

 

Instrument Panel

 

133

This page intentionally left blank.

134

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock …………………………………………..

136

Opening and Closing the Windows ….

166

Brightness Control ………………………

188

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Moonroof* ………………………………….

169

Driving Position Memory System* …. 189

Key Types and Functions ………………

139

Panoramic Roof* ………………………….

170

Adjusting the Steering Wheel ……….

191

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength………

141

Operating the Switches Around the

Adjusting the Mirrors

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Steering Wheel

Interior Rearview Mirror ……………….

192

Outside ……………………………………

142

ENGINE START/STOP Button………….

171

Power Door Mirrors …………………….

193

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Turn Signals ……………………………….

174

Adjusting the Seats

Inside ………………………………………

149

Light Switches…………………………….

175

Front Seats ………………………………..

194

Childproof Door Locks …………………

151

Fog Lights* ………………………………..

178

Rear Seats………………………………….

204

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ……….

152

Auto High-Beam …………………………

179

Armrest …………………………………….

207

Opening and Closing the Tailgate…

153

Daytime Running Lights ……………….

182

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Security System

Wipers and Washers ……………………

183

Interior Lights …………………………….

209

Immobilizer System ……………………..

163

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

Interior Convenience Items …………..

213

Security System Alarm………………….

163

Button …………………………………….

186

Climate Control System ……………….

231

* Not available on all models 135

Clock

Controls

 

Adjusting the Clock

 

Models without navigation system

 

You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power mode in ON.

Adjusting the Time

Models with color audio system

 

Using the MENU/CLOCK button
1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button

for two seconds.

2. Select Adjust Clock, then press .

 

3. Rotate to adjust the hours.

4. Press to switch to minute adjustment.

 

Rotate to adjust the minutes.
Press to switch to Set.
Press to complete clock adjustment.

1Clock

 

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.

1Using the MENU/CLOCK button

Models with color audio system

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

To change the setting between 12h and 24h:

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Clock Format, then press .
Rotate to select 12h or 24h, then press .
You can also access to the clock adjustment mode by pressing and holding the MENU/CLOCK button.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

Customized Features P. 422
136

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with Display Audio

 

Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen
Select , then select Settings.
Select System.
Select Date & Time.
Select Set Date & Time.
Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.

To adjust time:

Select Set Time.
Selecting 3 / 4 .
u AM/PM icon can be switched to each other either by selecting 3 / 4 , or by directly touching the icon.

u When you customize the clock display to 24 hour clock, AM/PM icon is not displayed.

Customized Features P. 429
Select Save to set the time.
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

 

Models with Display Audio

You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display or the Clock icon on the home screen.

Touch the clock on the display.
The clock screen of the select face-type appears.

Select Settings.
Select Date & Time Settings.
Select Set Date & Time.
Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.
Select Set Date or Set Time.
Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by selecting 3/ 4.
Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

Customized Features P. 429
Controls

 

Continued 137

ClockuAdjusting the Clock
To adjust date:

 

6. Select Set Date.

7. Selecting 3 / 4 .

8. Select Save to set the date.

 

Controls

138

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions

 

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Models without

Models with keyless

Models with keyless access

keyless access system

access system

system and power tailgate

 

Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.

Built-in Key
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the

 

Built-in Key doors when the keyless remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/

unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall

Release Knob

the built-in key, push the built-in key into the keyless remote until it clicks.

1Key Types and Functions

 

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.

Immobilizer System P. 163
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys:

Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand.
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

Models with remote engine start

You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.

Remote Engine Start* P. 524
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 139

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls

 

Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you

 

purchase a replacement key.

1Key Number Tag

 

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

140

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

 

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote when locking/ unlocking* the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking* the doors and tailgate, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:

Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.
1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

 

Communication between the keyless remote and the vehicle consumes the keyless remote’s battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the keyless remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

 

Controls

* Not available on all models 141

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

 

Except U.S. LX models

 

Using the Keyless Access System
When you carry the keyless remote, you can

 

lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate.

You can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

 

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you unlock the doors and tailgate.

No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds.

Doors and tailgate relocked: The lights go off immediately.

Interior Lights P. 209
1Using the Keyless Access System

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

142

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking the doors and tailgate
Press the door lock button on a front door or

 

Door Lock Button

the tailgate.

u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets.

 

Door Lock

Button

1Using the Keyless Access System

 

Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the keyless remote is within range.
If you grip a door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.
Controls

 

Continued 143

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

 

Controls

 

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

 

When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors and tailgate closed while carrying the keyless remote, the doors will automatically lock.

The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the keyless remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle.

Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and close door(s) and tailgate.

While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated.

Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock.

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen.

Turning ON auto lock function using the audio/ information screen, shall only activate the function in remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver’s door.

Customized Features P. 429
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors and tailgate are closed.

Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock function will not activate:

The remote is inside the vehicle. uThe buzzer will not sound.
The remote is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed.

uThe buzzer will sound.

144

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
To temporarily deactivate the function:

Set the power mode to OFF.
Open the driver’s door.
Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows:
Lock  Unlock  Lock  Unlock.

u The beeper sounds, and the function is deactivated.

To restore the function:

Set the power mode to ON.
Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function.
With the keyless remote on you, move out of the auto lock function operation range.
Open any door.
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®)

 

Models with power tailgate

If equipped, the user must wait until the power tailgate fully closes before the auto lock function will be activated.

The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.

The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
A door or the hood is not closed.
The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF.
The keyless remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper

After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.

The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through a window.
You are located too close to the vehicle.
The keyless remote is put inside the tailgate.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.

Controls

 

Continued 145

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Grab the driver’s door handle:

 

u The driver’s door unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger’s door handle:

u All doors and the tailgate unlock.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.

Press the tailgate outer handle:

 

u The tailgate unlocks and opens*.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice.

2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 158

Outer

Handle

1Using the Keyless Access System

 

The light flash, beeper, and unlock settings can be customized using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 429
You can also unlock and open with the power tailgate*.

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 158
* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

LED

 

Lock

Unlock Button

Button

LED

Lock

Unlock

Button

Button

Locking the doors and tailgate Press the lock button.
Once:

u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first push):

u The beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set.

Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Press the unlock button.

Once:

u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.

Twice:

u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 429
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.

Replacing the Remote Battery P. 667
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 429
Controls

 

Continued 147

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the lock or unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the key instead.

Fully insert the key and turn it.

 

Lock

Unlock

Locking a Door Without Using a Key
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.

Locking the front doors

Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.

■ Locking the rear doors

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

Lockout prevention system
The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when

the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 429
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.

148

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door

Lock Tab

Push the lock tab forward.

To Lock

 

■ Unlocking a door

Pull the lock tab rearward.

To Unlock

1Using the Lock Tab

 

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate lock at the same time.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.

 

Controls

Continued 149

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls

 

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.

 

Inner Handle u The door unlocks and opens in one motion.

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door.

u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*.

Models with color audio system

 

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

 

Customized Features P. 429
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

 

The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.

Childproof Door Locks P. 151
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Master Door Lock Switch

Press the master door lock switch in as shown

to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

To Lock

To Unlock

 

Childproof Door Locks

 

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.

 

When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.

Unlock

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

 

When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.

 

Controls

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Lock

151

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls

 

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode
All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Auto Door Unlocking
Driver’s door open mode
All doors and tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Models with color audio system

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface.

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.

Customized Features P. 429
152

Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Models without power tailgate

 

Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.

Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
All models

 

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:

u Avoid possible damage.

u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 78
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured.

Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.

Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.

When you are storing or picking up cargo from the cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*, while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 153

Opening and Closing the TailgateuPrecautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Controls

 

Models with power tailgate

 

The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver side control panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*.

The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in P.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

Models with power tailgate

WARNING
Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury.

Make sure everyone is clear before closing the power tailgate.

NOTICE

Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is being automatically opened or closed.

Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while in operation can deform the tailgate frame.

When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.

The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions:

You start the engine while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing.
The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.
The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.
The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

 

Using the Hands Free Access*
Use a forward and back kicking motion for about 1 second under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the keyless remote.

 

u Some exterior lights flash twice and a beeper sounds once, then the tailgate begins to move.

 

1 sec.

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

 

If you close the power tailgate with all the doors locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

1Using the Hands Free Access*

During rain or in other instances when the vehicle becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect your foot motion.

When performing work on or around the rear section of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close the tailgate.

To prevent this from happening, select Customized Features on the audio/information screen and then select OFF for the feature.

Customized Features P. 429
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long or sweep your foot from side to side, the power tailgate does not open or close.

This function will not operate if you don’t have the keyless remote on you. Please make sure you have the keyless remote on you.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 155

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

 

u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper sounds.

Power If you press the button again while the power

Tailgate tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.

Button

Customizing when to open the tailgate
Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting.

When Unlocked: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.

Customized Features P. 429
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

 

If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate.

Installing aftermarket components other than genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your cargo in and out.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle.

The beeper sounds when you start driving while the power tailgate is still open, or closing.

* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Using the Power Tailgate Button
To open or close the power tailgate, press the power tailgate button for about one second. u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper

 

sounds.

If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.

Power Tailgate Button

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

 

If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. The beeper sounds three times.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes.

Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate.

Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 157

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for no longer than one second, the tailgate opens automatically.

 

u The beeper sounds.

u If you want to open the tailgate

manually, press the button for more than

one second.

Outer

2 Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Handle

P. 153

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do

not have to unlock the tailgate before

opening it.

If you press the outer handle again while the

power tailgate is moving, it will reverse

direction.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

 

Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or keyless remote in the cargo area before closing the tailgate.

Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.

You can change the power tailgate operation setting on and off.

Customized Features P. 429
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*

Using the Tailgate Inner Button
Press the button on the tailgate to close the

 

power tailgate.

u The beeper sounds.

If you press the button again while the power

tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.

 

Controls

Continued 159

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Controls

 

Auto-Closer
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.

Power Tailgate Fall Detection
Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.

1Auto-Closer

The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is closing.

Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching.

Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.

 

1Power Tailgate Fall Detection

If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fall detection may be activated.

Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion.

If the power tailgate fall detection constantly activates, consult at a dealer.

160

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Using the Tailgate Outer Handle

When all the doors are unlocked or press the

tailgate unlock button on the remote

transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked.

Press the tailgate outer handle and lift open

the tailgate.

Models with keyless access system

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do

Outer

not have to unlock the tailgate before

Handle

opening it.

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,

pull the tailgate down, and push it closed

from outside.

 

1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle

 

Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or keyless remote in the cargo area before closing the tailgate.

Models with keyless access system

Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.

Controls

 

Inner Handle

Continued 161

Opening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
Controls

 

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate.

 

Tailgate

Unlock

Button

1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter or keyless remote, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

Tailgate

Unlock

Button

162

Security System

Immobilizer System

 

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:

Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/ STOP button.
Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
Security System Alarm

 

The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*.

However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.

1Immobilizer System

 

NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 163

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls

 

When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.

To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met:

The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
The hood is closed.
All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system*.
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

1Security System Alarm

 

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:

Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
Opening the hood with the hood release.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*.

* Not available on all models
Panic Mode

Panic

Button

The panic button on the remote
transmitter

If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds:

The horn sounds.
Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Controls

165

Opening and Closing the Windows

Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors.

The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

ON

 

OFF

Power Window Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s Window

Switch

Front Passenger’s

Window Switch

Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

Auto Reverse

If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

166

Opening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Close

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

Open

 

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.

 

Opening the Windows with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.

 

If the windows stop midway, repeat the

Unlock procedure.

Button

1Opening the Windows with the Remote

Models with moonroof

If you open the windows with the remote, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.

Controls

* Not available on all models Continued 167

Opening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Window with the key
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there.

 

Close

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Open

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows at the

desired position. If you want further

adjustment, repeat the same operation.

1Opening/Closing the Window with the key

 

Models with moonroof

If you open/close the windows with the key, the moonroof will open/close automatically along with them.

168

Moonroof*

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

 

You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Using the Moonroof Switch
1Opening and Closing the Moonroof

 

WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on

Models without panoramic roof

 

Open

Close Tilt

Models with panoramic roof

Open

Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, push the switch briefly.

Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch.

someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

Controls

 

Close

Tilt

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.

Opening the Windows with the Remote P. 167
Opening/Closing the Window with the key P. 168
* Not available on all models 169

Panoramic Roof*

Controls

 

Opening/Closing the Sunshade

 

You can operate the sunshade when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the sunshade.

Using the Sunshade Switch
Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Open

The sunshade automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the sunshade midway, touch the switch briefly.

Close

■ Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

1Opening/Closing the Sunshade

 

WARNING
Opening or closing the sunshade on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the sunshade before opening or closing it.

The sunshade can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to OFF.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the sunshade to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the sunshade is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

The sunshade can be opened or closed to adjust the amount of light that enters the cabin.

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

ENGINE START/STOP Button

Changing the Power Mode

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

The button is off.

The steering wheel is locked*1.

The power to all electrical

components is turned off.

ACCESSORY

The button blinks (in red).

Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

ON

The button blinks (in red).

All electrical components can be

used.

Without pressing

the brake pedal

Press the button.

*1: Canadian models

1ENGINE START/STOP Button

 

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

Operating Range

If the battery of the keyless remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 690
The engine may also run if the keyless remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

ON mode:

The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the engine is running.

Canadian models

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.

Controls

 

Continued 171

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls

 

Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.

Canadian models

 

When in this mode:

The steering wheel does not lock.

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the keyless access system.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beeper sounds.

1ENGINE START/STOP Button

 

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.

172

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Keyless Remote Reminder
When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the keyless remote in another location.

 

When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY

The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.

When the power mode is in ON
An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel.

1Keyless Remote Reminder

 

When the keyless remote is within the system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the warning function cancels.

If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system’s operational range.

Controls

 

173

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals

 

Right Turn

 

Left Turn

 

Controls

The turn signals can be used when the power

mode is in ON.

One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release

the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals

and turn signal indicator blink three times.

This feature can be used when signaling for a

lane change.

174

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches

Manual Operation

U.S. models

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Canadian models

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting.

 

High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.

Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Canadian models

 

Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:

The transmission is in P.
The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when:

The transmission is taken out of P and the parking brake is released.
The vehicle starts to move.
1Light Switches

 

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened.

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

Lights On Indicator P. 88
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.

Models without automatic headlight adjusting system

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Models with automatic headlight adjusting system

Your vehicle is equipped with the automatic headlight adjusting system that automatically adjusts the vertical angle of the high/low beam headlights. If you find a significant change in the vertical angle of the headlights, there may be a problem with the system. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Controls

 

Continued 175

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

Controls

 

U.S. models

 

Canadian models

Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.

When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.

The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO.

u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off.

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Models with automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Models without automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

176

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.

The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door.

If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

U.S. models

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting

The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

Max

Bright

High

Mid

Low

Dark

Min

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
U.S. models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 429
1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates during the headlights are off in AUTO.

The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 422
Controls

 

177

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
Fog Lights*

 

When the parking lights or the headlights are

 

on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog

lights.

Fog Light Switch

 

Controls

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Auto High-Beam

 

The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.

 

Front Sensor Camera

How to Use the Auto High-Beam
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

The power mode is in ON.

Auto High-Beam

The light switch is in AUTO.

Indicator

The lever is in the low beam position.

The headlights have been automatically
activated.

• It is dark outside the vehicle.

Light Switch

If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
1Auto High-Beam

 

The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

Front Sensor Camera P. 601
For the auto high-beam to work properly:

Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard.
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera.
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

Controls

 

Continued 179

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam:

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.

Controls

 

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 45mph (72 km/h) or more.
There are no preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are few street lights on the road ahead.
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 30 mph (48 km/h) or less.
There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are many street lights on the road ahead.

• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or

oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,

fog, windshield frost, etc.).

• Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,

electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating

the road ahead.

• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly

changes.

• The road is bumpy or has many curves.

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever:

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Using the light switch:

Turn the light switch to .

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or

oncoming direction.

• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.

• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.

• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers.

• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when:

Windshield wipers are operating.
The camera has detected a dense fog.
180

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary.

To turn the system off:

AUTO Position

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever

toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds.

After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks

twice, release the lever.

 

To turn the system on:

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield or Auto High-

Beam Cannot Operate: Clean Windshield message appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.

Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.

Controls

 

181

 

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Daytime Running Lights

 

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:

U.S. models

 

The power mode is in ON.
The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF.
The parking brake is released.
Canadian models

 

The power mode is in ON.
The headlight switch is AUTO.
The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

182

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers/Washers

1Wipers and Washers

 

Pull to

 

use

washer.

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring*

MIST

OFF

INT*1/AUTO*2

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.

MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO,
HI)

Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust wiper operation.

 

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting (+) and the LO setting become the same.

NOTICE

Controls

 

Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation

*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield* to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

* Not available on all models Continued 183

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls

 

Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

 

The wipers operate intermittently, at low

speed, or at high speed and stop in

accordance with the amount of rainfall the

rainfall sensor detects.

Adjustment Ring

Auto sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you

can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor

(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will

operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

 

Low sensitivity

High sensitivity

1Wipers and Washers

 

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

Rainfall Sensor

NOTICE

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Rear Wiper/Washer
INT: Intermittent

 

ON

OFF

Washer

Operating in reverse
The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the power mode is in ON.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

Washer ( )
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this

position.

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the

washer. Once released, it stops operating

after a few more sweeps.

Controls

 

When you change the transmission to R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

Front Wiper Operation

Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)

Continuous

HI (High speed wipe)

185

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

 

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.

 

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature.

 

Controls

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

 

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged.

Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may activate automatically for 10 minutes when you set the power mode to ON.

* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluHeated Windshield Button

Canadian models

 

Heated Windshield Button

Press the heatedwindshieldbuttontodeice the windshieldatthewiperparkareaand along thedriversideedgeofthewindshield when thepowermodeisinON.

The heated windshieldwillautomatically switch offafter15minutes.

1Heated Windshield Button

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When the outside temperature is below 39°F (4°C), the heated windshield may automatically activate. The system deactivates itself once the outside temperature reaches 43°F (6°C).

Controls

187

 

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls

 

Brightness Control

 

When the power mode is in ON, you can use

 

(+ Button

the + or – button to adjust instrument panel brightness.

Brighten: Press the + button.

Dim: Press the – button.

(- Button

You will hear a beeper when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the display while you are adjusting it.

1Brightness Control

 

Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.

When it is bright outside and the headlight integration with the wiper is activated, the instrument panel brightness does not change.

To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, press the (+ button until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds.

The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

188

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Driving Position Memory System*

 

You can store two driver’s seat (except for power lumbar) and door mirror positions with the driving position memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, or keyless access system, door mirrors adjust to one of the two preset positions and the seat adjusts to retracted positions of one of the two preset positions automatically.

The seat will move to the stored position when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY.

When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle.

DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
The driver’s seat moves rearward depending

DRIVER 1

DRIVER 2

on the set seating position once you

Stop the vehicle.

Put the transmission in P.

Turn the engine off.

Open the driver’s door.

 

Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY position, the driver’s seat moves to the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.

1Driving Position Memory System*

 

Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat and door mirrors adjustment function.

Customized Features P. 429
The driver’s seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/ OFF.

Customized Features P. 429
System Operation

The system will not operate if:

The vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
Either memory position button is pressed while the seat is in motion.
The seat position is adjusted while in operation.
The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 189

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
Storing a Position in Memory
1Storing a Position in Memory

 

Controls

 

Memory Button 1

 

SET Button

Memory Button 2

Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the driver’s seat and the door mirrors to the desired position.
Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory button indicator light will blink.

Press and hold memory button 1 or 2 within five seconds of pressing the SET button.
u You will hear two beeps, and the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on once the seat and the outside mirror positions have been memorized.

After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when:

You do not press the memory button within five seconds.
You readjust the seat position and door mirror before the double-beep.
You set the power mode to any position except ON.
Recalling the Stored Position
1.

Put the transmission into P.

2.

Apply the parking brake.

Memory Buttons

3.

Press a memory button ( 1 or 2).

 

u You will hear a beep, and the indicator light will blink.

The seat and the door mirrors will automatically move to the memorized positions. When it has finished moving, you will hear the beep, and the indicator light stays on.

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you:

Press the SET button or memory button (1 or (2.
Adjust the seat position or door mirrors.
Put the transmission into a position other than (P.
190

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

While the vehicle is stopped, push the steering wheel adjustment lever down.

u The steering wheel adjustment lever is under the steering column.

Move the steering wheel up or down, and
To lock

in or out.

u Make sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

Lever

To adjust

3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position.

u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Controls

 

191

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror

 

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
1Adjusting the Mirrors

 

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

Controls

 

Tab

 

Daytime

Position

Night Position

Flip the tab to switch the position.

The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

Front Seats P. 194
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror* and Power Door Mirrors*
Sensor

When you are driving after dark, the

automatic dimming rearview mirror and

power door mirror reduce the glare from

headlights behind you. Press the AUTO button

to turn this function on and off. When

activated, the AUTO indicator comes on.

 

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror* and Power Door Mirrors*

The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.

Auto Button

* Not available on all models
Power Door Mirrors

 

Adjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Folding

Selector

Button*

Switch

 

Adjustment Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

power mode is in ON.

Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

Folding door mirrors*
Press the folding button to fold in and out the

door mirrors.

Controls

 

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror*
Selector

 

Switch

If activated, either side door mirror

automatically tilts downward when you put

the transmission into R; this improves close-

in visibility on the selected side of the vehicle

when backing up. The mirror automatically

returns to its original position when you take

the transmission out of R.

To activate this feature, set the power mode

to ON, and slide the selector switch to the left

or right side.

* Not available on all models 193

Adjusting the Seats

Front Seats

 

Controls

 

Allow sufficient space.

 

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

Move back.

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

1Adjusting the Seats

 

WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seats*

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment*

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch* Press the front: To increase the entire lumbar support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar support.

 

Controls

Lumbar

Support

Adjustment

Switch

* Not available on all models Continued 195

Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Controls

 

Adjusting the front manual seats*

Height Adjustment

(Driver side only)

Pull up or push down the lever

to raise or lower the seat.

1Adjusting the front manual seats*

 

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

* Not available on all models
Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

 

The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

 

WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Controls

 

197

Adjusting the SeatsuSecond Row Seats
Second Row Seats

 

Adjusting the Seat Positions

1Second Row Seats

 

Controls

 

Horizontal Position Adjustment

 

Pull up the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Pull up the lever to change

the angle.

WARNING
An unsecured seat or seat-back can move out of position or collapse without warning if there is sudden acceleration or stop or in a crash.

A seat or seat-back that suddenly moves or collapses can result in severe injury or death.

Always make sure all seats and seat-backs are securely locked into position before driving.

198

uuAdjusting the SeatsuThird Row Seats

Third Row Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull the strap to change

the angle.

1Third Row Seats

 

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

 

Controls

199

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls

 

Head Restraints

 

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions
Head restraints are most effective for

 

protection against whiplash and other rear-

impact crash injuries when the center of the

back of the occupant’s head rests against the

center of the restraint. The tops of the

occupant’s ears should be level with the

center height of the restraint.

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

 

1Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

In order for the head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.
Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper location.
200

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Changing the Second Row*/Third Row Center Seat Head Restraint Position
A passenger sitting in the second and third row center seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving.

 

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release button(s).

Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

Except third row outer seat head restraints

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Front and second row outer seat head restraint

 

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.

Second row/third row center seat head restraint

 

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release buttons which are located on the both legs at the same time, and pull the restraint up and out.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

 

WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 201

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls

 

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button(s). Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

Folding Down the Third Row Outer Head Restraint
A passenger in the third row seating position

should put the head restraint in the upright

position before the vehicle begins moving.

To fold down the head restraint:

Pull the strap.

Strap

To put the head restraint back in the

upright position:

Pull up the head restraint and push rearward

until it latches.

 

202

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

Controls

 

203

Adjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Rear Seats

Controls

 

Third Row Seat Access

Strap

Models with button type

 

Pressing the button on the seat-back, or seat cushion tilts the second row outer seat’s seat-back forward.

u The whole seat slides forward.

Models with lever type

 

Pulling the lever on the seat side, and the second row outer seat’s seat-back forward.

u The whole seat slides forward.

All models

 

Pulling up on the strap also tilts the seat-back forward.

1Third Row Seat Access

 

The button is disabled when the vehicle is moving.

When you enter the third row seat, be careful not to trip over the second row seat belt.

204

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Folding Down the Second Row Seat
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the second row seat to make room for cargo.

Models with bench seat

 

Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.

2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.

2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 44

Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back.
All models

 

Pull up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever.
Lever

To return the seat to the original position, pull up the seat-back in the upright position.

1Folding Down the Second Row Seat

 

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
The front seats must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the second row seats as they fold down.

To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks.

Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving.

Models with bench seat

Make sure the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.

Controls

 

Continued 205

Adjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls

 

Folding Down the Third Row Seat
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the third row seat to make room for cargo.

To fold down the seat
Pull the strap on the seat-back fully. u The head restraint tilts downward.
Push the seat-back forward while pulling the strap.

Strap

1Folding Down the Third Row Seat

 

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the third row seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

■ To return the seat to the original position

1To return the seat to the original position

1.

Pull the seat-back up with the strap pulled.

Make sure the seat-back and head restraints are

2.

Pull the head restraint up to its original position.

securely latched back into place before driving.

206

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest

Using the Front Seat Armrest

Pull down the armrest.

 

Models with adjustable armrest

 

Pull the armrest all the way down, then pull it

up to the desired angle.

 

Controls

Continued 207

Adjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls

 

Using the Second Row Seat Armrest
Models with captain seat

Pull down the armrest.

 

Pull down the armrest of the center backrest.

Models with bench seat

 

208

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

Interior Light Switches
Models without panoramic roof

 

Door Activated Position

Off

On

Models with panoramic roof

 

Door Activated Position

ON

The interior lights come on regardless of whether the tailgate and doors are open or closed.

Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following situations:

When the tailgate or any doors are opened.
You unlock the driver’s door.
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the tailgate or the doors are open or closed.

1Interior Light Switches

 

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.

The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations:

When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.

Models with color audio system

Vehicle Customization P. 125
Models with Display Audio

Customized Features P. 429
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:

Controls

 

Off On

When you lock the driver’s door.
When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode.
When you set the power mode to ON.
If you leave any of the tailgate or doors open in

VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights go off after

about 15 minutes.

To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the

interior light on for an extended length of time when

the engine or power system is off.

Continued 209

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls

 

Map Lights

■ Front

Models without panoramic roof

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the lenses or buttons.

 

Models with panoramic roof

1Map Lights

 

Models without panoramic roof

When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.

210

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Models without panoramic roof

Second and third row
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses when the front interior light switch is in the door activated position.

1 Map Lights

When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the rear map light will not go off when you press the lens.

Models with panoramic roof

Controls

Continued 211

 

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls

 

Cargo Area Light

Off

On

Tailgate Activated Position

ON
The light comes on regardless of whether the

tailgate is open or closed.

Tailgate activated
The light comes on when you open the

tailgate, and goes off when closed.

OFF
The light stays off with or without opening the

tailgate.

212

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

Glove Box

Pull the lever to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the built-in key.

 

To Lock

Glove Box

Console Compartment
To open the console compartment, press the button to unlock the lid, and then slide it rearward.

 

1Glove Box

 

WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

Controls

 

Button

Continued 213

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Console Tray

Slide the tray when you use the console

compartment.

 

Controls

214

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders
Front seat beverage holders

Are located in the console between the front seats.

■ Door side beverage holders

Front

Are located on the both of front and rear door

side pockets.

 

1Beverage Holders

 

NOTICE

Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

 

Rear

Continued 215

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Second row bench seat beverage

holders*

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat

beverage holders.

Second row captain seat beverage holders*

Third row seat beverage holders

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.

Console panel

Open the lid and the cover to use it.

Console compartment

Pull the handle and open the cover to use it.

1Accessory Power Sockets

 

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the power socket.

Controls

 

Continued 217

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Cargo area*

Open the cover to use it.

AC Power Outlet*
The AC power outlet can be used when the engine is running.

Open the cover to use it. Plug in the appliance slightly, turn it 90° clockwise, then push it all the way.

 

1AC Power Outlet*

 

NOTICE

Do not use the AC power outlet for electric appliances that require high initial peak wattage, such as cathode-ray tube type televisions, refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for devices that process precise data, such as medical equipment, and that require an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 150 watts or less.

Continued use of any electric appliance/device exceeding these ratings may result in damage to the appliance/device.

When the AC power outlet is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the AC power outlet.

* Not available on all models
* Not available on all models

Green Indicator

Charging Area

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Wireless Charger*
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

 

1. Place the device you want to charge on the

 

charging area.

u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the green

indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible

with the system and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.

When charging is completed, the green indicator light will go off.
u If the device is not located on the charge area correctly, the green indicator light will blink.

1Wireless Charger*

 

FCC statement

This product complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communication Commission), described below:

This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used per the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

In order to use safely:

Remove any metal objects from the charge pad before charging a device.
Do not open the charger case.
Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact your dealer.
Controls

 

Continued 219

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator

Cause

Solution

There is an obstacle(s) between

Remove the

the charging area and the

obstacle(s).

device.

Slow Blink

Move the device to the

The device is not within the

center of the charging

charging area.

area where

is

located.

Turn the vehicle off

Fast Blink

The wireless charger is faulty.

and back on. If the

indicator still blinks,

contact a dealer.

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you.

Always remove foreign objects from the charge pad before charging the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.
Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the wireless charger function.

Customized Features P. 429
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

1Wireless Charger*

This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

 

NOTICE

Do not place any magnetic recording media or

precision machines within the charging area while

charging.

The data on your cards such as credit cards can be

lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision

machines such as watches can be affected.

“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks

owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:

The device is already fully charged.
The temperature of the device is extremely high while charging.
You are at a place that emits strong electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its

chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the

charging area.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 221

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Coat Hooks
There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle of both sides. Pull it down to use it.

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when:

All the doors and the tailgate are closed
– to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the keyless access system.

The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

1Coat Hooks

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.

 

You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.

Push

Conversation mirror*

The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror. Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it back to the first detent.

You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.

1Sunglasses Holder

 

Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 223

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Integrated Sunshades*
1Integrated Sunshades*

 

Tab

 

Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the way. Use the hooks to hang it.

Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully closed. Using the shade while a window is open can unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and hurting anyone sitting near the window.

Controls

 

Hook

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Front Seat Heaters*
The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

Press the seat heater button:

 

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

1Front Seat Heaters*

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 225

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators*
The seat heaters or ventilators can be used when the power mode is in ON.

 

The seat heaters: Use them to warm up the seat.

The seat ventilators: Use them when you want to ventilate the surface of the seats. When used with the air conditioning, the surface of the seats will become easier to cool.

Press the seat heater or the seat ventilator button:

 

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

1Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators*

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Second Row Outer Seat Heaters*
The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.

 

There is no heater in the rear center seating position.

Press the seat heater button:

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

1Second Row Outer Seat Heaters*

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 227

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Heated Steering Wheel*

Indicator

Heated Steering Wheel Button

The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel.

Press the button on the right side of the steering wheel.

When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Heated Steering Wheel*

 

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Tie-down Anchors

Anchor

Anchor

Cargo Hooks

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.

The cargo hooks on both sides of the cargo area can be used to hang a light items.

1Cargo Hooks

 

Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the cargo area, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

Controls

 

Continued 229

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Under-floor Storage Area
Pull the handle to open the cargo floor lid.

 

Storing items on the lid at the bottom

This is convenient when storing a tall item.

1. Pull the handle and open the lid.

2. Pull the lid towards you until it disengages from the support rods.

Push the far end of the lid down to the bottom of the under-floor storage area, then lower the other end.

1Storing items on the lid at the bottom

 

The lid can be flipped over and placed in either upper or lower position. This allows for storage of dirty items, or items that may damage the carpet lining of the lid.

230

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

 

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

 

Dashboard and

Dashboard and floor, Floor vents

Floor and

back of the center

and back of the

defroster

console vents

center console vents

vents

AUTO Button

A/C (Air Conditioning)

Button

Driver’s Side

Passenger’s Side

Temperature

Temperature Control

Control Switch

Switch

(On/Off) Button

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

(Windshield Defroster)

Fan Control Button

Button

(Recirculation) Button

Use the system when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO button.
Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side temperature control switch.
Press the ON/OFF button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.

During idle-stops, air-conditioning is suspended, and only the blower remains active.

If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel idle-stop.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may operate at low speed for a while after the AUTO button has been pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Controls

 

Continued 231

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls

 

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.

Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Pressing the button turns the air

 

conditioner system on and automatically

switches the system to fresh air mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the

 

system returns to the previous settings.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the engine restarts automatically.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.

232

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

To rapidly defrost the windows
Press the button.

2. Press the button.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

 

After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

 

Controls

233

Climate Control SystemuSynchronization Mode
Synchronization Mode

 

Controls

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, front passenger side and rear seats in synchronization mode.

Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to synchronization mode.

Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch.
1Synchronization Mode

 

When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.

When the system is in synchronization mode off, the temperature for the driver, front passenger, and rear seats can be set separately.

Press the SYNC button to return to synchronization mode off.

234

uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System

Rear Climate Control System

Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel

(Rear On/Off) Button RR SETTINGS Button

Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating.

Press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button.
Press the RR SETTINGS button.
u The system switches to the rear control mode for 10 seconds. The REAR indicator appears on the display.

1Rear Climate Control System

 

Models with rear lock button

LOCK appears on the rear control panel while the rear lock is on.

If the rear lock is on while in SYNC mode, the rear control panel is disabled. LOCK SYNC appears on the rear control panel.

1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel

 

Models with rear lock button

Controls

REAR LOCK

Button

Press the REAR LOCK button to turn the rear lock mode on and off.

While the rear lock mode is on, the rear control panel is disabled.

uREAR LOCK appears on the display.

When the rear fan is set to maximum speed, Auto Idle Stop does not activate.

uAuto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system is in use.

Continued 235

Climate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System
Controls

 

Press the AUTO button.
u The rear system changes to AUTO mode.

u The system automatically adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain the set rear temperature. Change the temperature if necessary.

To turn off the rear climate control system, press the (Rear On/Off) button.
Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel*

Rear floor Rear console Rear console

vents vents and vents

floor vents

1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel*

 

When the REAR LOCK button on the front control panel is off, the temperature of the rear passenger compartment can be controlled independently.

Rear Temperature Control Buttons

Rear AUTO Button

/

(Rear Fan

Control) Buttons

(Rear On/Off) Button

236

Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating.

Press the (Rear On/Off) button.
Press the Rear AUTO button.
Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control button.
To turn off the rear climate control system, press the button.
* Not available on all models

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

 

The automatic climate control system is

Sensor

equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill

any liquid on them.

 

Controls

 

Sensor

237

This page intentionally left blank.

238

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

General Information on the Audio

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment

About Your Audio System…………….

240

System

System* …………………………………….

374

USB Ports …………………………………..

241

SiriusXM® Radio Service* ……………..

349

Customized Features…………….

422, 429

Auxiliary Input Jack ……………………..

242

Recommended CDs* …………………..

350

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*.. 448

Audio System Theft Protection

……… 243

Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®…..

451, 476

Audio Remote Controls………………..

244

Flash Drives ………………………………

352

CabinTalkTM *………………………………..

502

Audio System Basic Operation…..

247, 265

Honda App License Agreement……..

354

Audio Error Messages

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/

CD Player* …………………………………

344

Android Auto……………………………

366

iPod/USB Flash Drive ……………………

346

About Open Source Licenses…………

368

License Information*

369

Models with Display Audio

Android/Apps …………………………….

348

* Not available on all models 239

Audio System

About Your Audio System

 

The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio* service. It can also play audio CDs*, WMA/MP3/AAC files*, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone, iPad* and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons* and knobs on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.

 

*1

Features

*2

iPod

USB Flash Drive

Remote Controls

*1: Models with color audio system

*2: Models with Display Audio

1About Your Audio System

 

SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio, contact a dealer.*

General Information on the Audio System P. 349
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.*

SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.*

Models with Blu-rayTM player

Video CDs and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported.

iPod®, iPad®, iPhone® and iTunes® are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Models with Display Audio

After you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, you can use the audio system for up to 30 minutes per driving cycle, or until opening the driver’s door.

However, whether you can continue using the audio system depends on the battery condition. Repeatedly using this feature may drain the battery.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports

USB Ports

On the console panel

 

Models

with

color

audio

system

Models

with

Display

Audio

In the console compartment

 

On the console panel

Models with color audio system

The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a cell phone, and charging devices.

Models with Display Audio

The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. u To prevent any potential issues, be sure

to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.

In the console compartment
The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging devices.

1USB Ports

 

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
USB charge

The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does not output 2.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

In the console compartment

This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to it.

Features

 

Continued 241

Audio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
On the back of the console compartment

 

USB Ports

 

On the back of the console
compartment*

The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.

1USB Ports

 

On the back of the console compartment

These ports are for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to them.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.

Features

Auxiliary Input Jack

 

Use the jack to connect devices.

 

Open the cover.
Connect a device to the input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches to the AUX mode.

1Auxiliary Input Jack

Models with color audio system

To switch to another mode, press the RADIO or MEDIA button.

To return to the AUX mode, press the MEDIA button.

Models with Display Audio

To switch to another mode or return to the AUX mode, select the audio source icon.

You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection

 

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Turn on the audio system.

3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a

connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize

the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

 

Features

243

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features

 

Audio Remote Controls

 

Models with color audio system

 

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.

SOURCE Button

/

(+/

(-

Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

Buttons

Bar

FM1FM2AMUSB/iPodBluetooth®

AudioAUX

+/ – (Volume) Bar

Press +: To increase the volume.

SOURCE Button

Press -: To decrease the volume.

 

/ Buttons

When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.

Press : To select the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : To select the next strong station.

Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.

Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.

Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

1Audio Remote Controls

 

Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

244

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Models with Display Audio

 

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.

+/ – (Volume) Bar

3

/

4

/

/

(+/

(-

Press +: To increase the volume.

Buttons

Bar

Press -: To decrease the volume.

 

ENTER Button

1Audio Remote Controls

 

Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

Press the (back) button to go back to the previous screen or cancel a command.

Press the (home) button to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.

You can show or hide the audio mode icons, or change the order of the icons.

Show/Hide Apps P. 122
Arrange Apps P. 123
Features

 

Continued 245

 

Features

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
3 / 4 / / /ENTER Buttons

When selecting the audio mode
Press 3 or 4 to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver information interface, and then press the ENTER button.

Press 3 or 4 : To cycles through the audio modes as follows: Android Auto/Apple CarPlaySiriusXM®*Rear Entertainment*AUX

InputAMBluetooth® AudioSocial PlaylistFMMy Honda MusicUSB/ iPodCD*

When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.

Press : To select the previous preset radio station.

When listening to a CD*, iPod, USB flash drive, My Honda Music, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.

Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

* Not available on all models
(Back) Button MENU/CLOCK Button

Selector Knob

Menu Display

(Day/Night) Button

(Sound) Button

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with color audio system

To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK

 

button to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.

 

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection.

 

MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode.

The available modes include wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play mode choices include scan, random, repeat, and so on.

 

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.

(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.

(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen

 

brightness.

Press the

button, then adjust the brightness using

.

u Each time you press the

button, the mode switches between the daytime

mode, nighttime mode and off mode.

 

1Audio System Basic Operation

 

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Menu Items

Adjusting the Clock P. 136
Wallpaper Setup P. 250
Adjusting the Sound P. 252
Display Setup P. 253
Customized Features P. 422
Press the button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
One of the operating systems used in this unit is eCos.

For software license terms and condition, visit their

website (eCos license URL:

http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html)

For source code disclosure and other details

regarding eCos, visit:

http://www.hondaopensource2.com

Features

 

247

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display

Features

 

Audio/Information Screen

Audio

Clock/Wallpaper

248

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio
Shows the current audio information.

Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

Change display
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .

u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio.

Features

Continued 249

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 241

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
.

 

5. Rotate to select Import, then press .

 

u The picture name is displayed on the list.

Rotate to select a desired picture, then press .
u The selected picture is displayed.

Press to save the picture.
Press to select OK.
Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

 

1Wallpaper Setup

 

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, a message appears.
250

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Select, then press .

u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
To view wallpaper once it is set

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .

u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press .
Delete wallpaper

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .

u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

Features

 

251

Audio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound

 

(Sound) Button

Press the

(sound) button, and rotate

to scroll through the following choices:

 

1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Features

 

Selector Knob

 

TRE is selectable.

BAS

 

TRE

FAD

BAL

SUBW

SVC

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Sub woofer

Speed-sensitive

Volume Compensation

Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then

press .

 

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press .
Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.

Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.

Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Color Theme, then press .
Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

Features

 

253

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

 

Features

 

RADIO Button

Press to select a band.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to search up and

down the selected band for a station

with a strong signal.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.

254

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select the station, then press .

Update List

Updates your available station list at any time.

Press while listening to an FM station.
Rotate to select Update List, then press .

Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press .

 

1Playing AM/FM Radio

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into reset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6 stations each.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

 

255

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Ports P. 241

Features

 

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod is connected.

MEDIA Button

Press to select iPod (if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Album Art

Play Mode Buttons

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to change songs.

Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous

display or cancel a setting.

256

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the iPod music list.

Category

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Selection

 

Item

 

Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category.

Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen to is
displayed.

 

1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 346
Features

 

Continued 257

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

Shuffle: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

258

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Ports P. 241

USB Indicator

Audio/Information Screen

Appears when a USB flash drive

is connected.

MEDIA Button

Selector Knob

Press to select USB flash drive

(if connected).

Turn to change folders.

VOL/

(Volume/Power) Knob

Press, and then turn to select an

item. After that, press again to

Press to turn the audio system on

make your selection.

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

MENU/CLOCK Button

/

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press to display the menu items.

Press

or

to change files.

(Back) Button

Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Press to select a play mode.

*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Features

 

Continued 259

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
Press to display a folder list.

Folder

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

Selection

 

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 349
Files in WMA and AAC format protected by digital rights management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 346
Track

Selection 3. Press to display a list of files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

 

260

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.

Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons.

 

Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat

Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.

Random

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

 

261

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 457

Bluetooth Indicator

Audio/Information Screen

Appears when your phone

Selector Knob

is connected to HFL.

Turn to change groups.

Press to display a music search list. Press,

and then turn to select an item. After

that, press again to make your selection.

MEDIA

Button

Press to select

the Bluetooth

Audio mode

(if

connected).

MENU/CLOCK

VOL/

Button

(Volume/

Press to

Power) Knob

display the

Press to turn

menu items.

the audio

system on

(Back) Button

Pause Button (Preset 2)

and off.

Press to pause playing a file.

Press to go back to

Turn to adjust

the previous

the volume.

Play Button (Preset 1)

display.

Press to resume playing a file.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change files.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

262

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

MEDIA Button

 

Pause Button

Play Button

To pause or resume a file
Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some phones.

If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

Features

 

Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode.

Continued 263

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the music search list.

Category

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Selection

 

Item

Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category.

Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is displayed.

 

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob

 

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

264

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with Display Audio

 

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

: Select to go to the home screen.

 

(Back) Icon

2 Switching the Display P. 266

(Home) Icon

 

: Select to go back to the previous display

when it is displayed.

(Day/Night) Icon

: Select to change the audio/information

 

screen brightness.

Select once and select or to make

 

an adjustment.

u Each time you select , the mode

 

switches among the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

Features

 

265

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display
Using the audio/information screen

Home Screen

Models without

navigation system

(Home) Icon

 

Features

Models with

navigation system

All Apps

Select to go to the home screen.

 

Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.

1Audio/Information Screen

 

Touchscreen Operation

Use simple gestures – including touching, swiping, and scrolling – to operate certain audio functions.
Some items may be grayed out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction.
You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or use voice commands.
Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

Customized Features P. 429
266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Phone
Displays the HFL information.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 476

Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.

Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset Trip A/B, select Reset.

To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Trip A Reset Method or Trip B Reset Method.

Clock
Displays the clock.

System Updates
Updates the software version of the audio system.

2 System Updates P. 280

FM/AM/Sirius XM*/CD*/USB/Bluetooth Audio/AUX Input/My Honda Music/Social Playlist
Displays the audio information.

Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.

Customized Features P. 429
Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 267

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Navigation*
Displays the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink
Displays the HondaLink® screen.

2 HondaLink® P. 329

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Apple CarPlay P. 337
Android Auto P. 340
Messages
Displays the text message screen.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 476

CabinTalk*
Displays the CabinTalk screen.

CabinTalkTM * P. 502
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Rear Entertainment* Displays the rear audio screen.
2 Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System* P. 374

AT&T Hotspot*
Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen.

2 AT&T Hotspot* P. 335

File Manager
Displays the file manager screen.

2 File Manager P. 286

 

Features

* Not available on all models Continued 269

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
Connect the USB flash drive to the front

USB port.

2 USB Ports P. 241

Select Clock.
3. Select Settings.

Select Clock Faces.
Select Add More.
u The File Manager screen is displayed.

Import a desired picture.

2 How to Transfer a File P. 286

u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.

The file name must be fewer than 255 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, or WebP.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No Data message appears.
270

Select wallpaper
Select Clock.
Select Settings.
Select Clock Faces.
Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the screen.

Select Save.
u The display will return to the clock screen.

To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Select .

2. Select Clock.

Delete wallpaper

Select Clock.
Select Settings.
Select Clock Faces.
Select Delete Photos.
u The File Manager screen is displayed.

Delete a picture.
How to Delete a File P. 289
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Continued 271

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Home Screen
To change to a next screen

1Home Screen

 

The home screen has 5 pages. You cannot add any

more pages.

Select to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

Features

 

Selecting

<

Icon

Swipe

Icon

>

<

Current page position

or > , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

272

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.
Select .

2. Select All Apps.

Check the box of the app you want to add.
u The app icon will be added on the home screen.

All Apps

Icon

1To add app icons on the home screen

 

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 447
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 447
In case those apps still do not start up normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser start up.

Features

 

Check Box

Continued 273

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization

screen.

2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want

it to be.

Select and hold.

3. Select Done.

u The screen will return to the home

screen.

1To move icons on the home screen

 

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Drag and drop.

274

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization screen.

2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove

to the Hide icon.

Select and hold. u The icon is removed from the home

screen.

Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

1To remove icons on the home screen

 

Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

 

Features

Drag and drop to

Hide icon.

Continued 275

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen
Three shortcut icons for accessing apps displayed on the home screen are displayed in the upper left area of the screen. You can replace any of these shortcut icons with an icon of your preference.

1To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen

 

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

1. From the home screen, select and hold the

icon that you want to store in the upper left

of the screen.

u The screen will switch to the

customization screen.

Select and hold.

2. Drag the icon over to the upper left of the

Preset

screen and drop it over the icon that you

want to replace.

Features

Icons

3. Select Done.

u The new icon will appear in place of the

old icon.

u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Drag and

drop to preset

icon.

 

276

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Status Area
Select the system status icon.

u The status area appears.

Select an item to see the details.
3. Select or the system status icon to close

 

the area.

System

Status Icon

 

Features

Status Area

Continued 277

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Updating Apps
Some of the audio system’s apps can be updated wirelessly when connected via Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth® in conjunction with the HondaLink® app installed on a compatible iOS or Android device. If an update is available, a notification is displayed at the top of the screen with the respective app’s update icon.

To update an app:
A notification appears and notifies you of an update message on the header area.

1Updating Apps

 

The wireless updates are for the apps on the audio system only.

To update compatible apps on your iPhone or Android phone, please visit the App Store or Google Play Store, respectively.

Select the system status icon, and then select the software update notification from the list.

278

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
3. Select Download.

 

Select OK.

u A notification appears on the screen if

the update is successful. Select OK.

u Restart the engine for the update to be

applied.

Features

 

279

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features

 

System Updates

 

The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB device.

How to Update Wirelessly
Wireless connection mode setup
Select .
Select System Updates.

3. Select Settings.

Select Connection Setup.
Select Change Mode.
Select Network, then Save.

u The display returns to the network list.

7. Select an access point from the network list, then Connect.

u If the audio system requires a password, enter a password.

1Wireless connection mode setup

 

If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you do not need the wireless connection mode setup.

280

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

How to update
When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/ information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system.

Select .
Select System Updates.

Notification

Select via Wireless.
Select Download Now.

u A notification appears on the screen.

Features

Continued 281

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF.
u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

 

1How to update

 

If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user turns the vehicle back on after the update has been completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild the applications, during which time the Honda logo will be displayed.

Features

282

Automatic download settings
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.

1.

Select

.

2. Select

System Updates.

3.

Select

Settings.

4. Select Auto Download.

5.

Select the access point, then Allow.

 

■ View an update result

Use the following procedure to confirm the update result.

1.

Select

.

2. Select

System Updates.

3.

Select

Settings.

4.

Select

Update Result.

 

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

Features

Continued 283

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features

 

How to Update with a USB Device
Download the update files from the server
Select .
Select System Updates.

3. Select via USB.

u A notification appears on the screen.

Connect a USB device into the front USB
port.

u The inventory data is copied into the USB device.

2 USB Ports P. 241

Remove the USB device from the USB port.
Connect the USB device into your

computer, and then download the update files.

u Follow the link to download the required software update files. Refer to https://usb.honda.com for instructions.

1How to Update with a USB Device

 

A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.

Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.

284

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Update the audio system
Select .
Select System Updates.

3. Select via USB.

u A notification appears on the screen.

Connect the USB device with the update
files into the USB port.

u A notification appears on the screen.

2 USB Ports P. 241

Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF.

u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

1Update the audio system

 

If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user turns the vehicle back on after the update has been completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild the applications, during which time the Honda logo will be displayed.

Features

 

285

 

Features

Audio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
File Manager

 

Allows you to transfer image or audio files to the audio system with a USB device.

How to Transfer a File
Connect a USB device into the USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 241

 

2. Select , then select All Apps.

 

3. Select File Manager.

4. Select Transfer Content.

To transfer a selected file:

 

5. Select Select Files to Transfer.

286

uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager

Select the file or folder you want to transfer.
Select OK.

8. Select Transfer.

 

u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue.

u A notification appears on the screen if the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.

1How to Transfer a File

 

To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.

Features

 

Continued 287

Audio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Features

 

To transfer all files:

 

5. Select Transfer All Content.

Select Transfer.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue.

u A notification appears on the screen if the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.

 

1How to Transfer a File

 

To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.

288

How to Delete a File
1. Select , then select All Apps.

 

2. Select File Manager.

3. Select Delete Content.

To delete a selected file:

 

4. Select Select Files to Delete.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager

 

Features

Continued 289

Audio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Features

 

Select the file or folder you want to delete.
Select OK.

Select Delete.
u A notification appears on the screen if

the deletion is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.

 

1How to Transfer a File

 

To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.

290

uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager

To delete all files:

 

4. Select Delete All Content.

Select Delete.

u A notification appears on the screen if the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.

1How to Transfer a File

 

To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.

Features

 

291

Audio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features

 

Adjusting the Sound

 

Select .
Select an audio source icon.

3. Select Sound.

Select an item from the following choices:

 

Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
• Center / Subwoofer Volume: Center*,

Subwoofer

• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader

• Audio Zones*: Driver Only, Front Only,

Rear Only, Full Vehicle

Speed Volume Compensation: Speed Volume Compensation (SVC)
DTS Neural Surround*: DTS Neural SurroundTM
1Adjusting the Sound

 

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound the following procedure.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Center / Subwoofer Volume and Balance / Fader, select Reset.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Select .
Select Settings.

3. Select Display.

4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode.

5. Select the setting you want.

6. Select Save.

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

To reset the settings, select Reset.

 

Features

Continued 293

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features

 

Selecting an Audio Source

Select the source icon

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

294

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation

 

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.

The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:

Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using.
The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands.

2 Voice Portal Screen P. 296

Close the windows and moonroof*.
Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling.
Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
1Voice Control Operation

 

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 295

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

Voice Portal Screen

When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep.

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

*1: Models with navigation system

Phone
This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Call <Your Contact Name>
Call <Phone Number>
Call <Category>
Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.

Audio
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.

FM
AM
USB
Sirius XM*
My Honda Music
Navigation*1
The screen changes the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Voice Help
Readout voice guidance for Help on current screen.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Call <Your Contact Name>
Call <Phone Number>
Call <Category>
Audio Commands
The system accepts these commands on the

dedicated screen for the voice recognition

of the audio.

FM Commands
Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
AM Commands
Tune to <530-1710> AM
Sirius XM Commands*
Channel <1-999>
Channel <station name>
USB/My Honda Music Commands
Play Artist
Play Album
Play Genre
Play Playlist
Play Music
Play Song
Features

 

* Not available on all models 297

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

 

Features

 

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)

Knob

Push to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek Icons

Select or to search up and down

the selected band for a station with a

strong signal.

Tune Icon

Select to use the on-screen keyboard for

entering the radio frequency directly.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a strong

signal.

Audio/Information Screen

Settings Icon

Select whether to tune to

HD RadioTM* automatically.

Preset Icons

Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display preset 5 onwards.

* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Preset Memory
To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.

Select Station List to display a list.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select Station List to display a list.
Select Refresh.
1Preset Memory

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.

Models with HD RadioTM feature

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Features

 

Continued 299

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features

 

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or .

 

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select Refresh.
1Radio Data System (RDS)

 

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

300

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Models with HD RadioTM feature

 

HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station.

Select HD Radio Channels.
Select the channel number.

Features

301

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

Features

 

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Push to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Album Art

Station Art

Audio/Information Screen

Preset Icons

Channel Icons

Select or to the previous or next channel.

Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Category Icons

Select or to display and select a

SiriusXM® Radio category.

Tune the radio frequency for

preset memory. Select and hold

the preset icon to store that

station. Select > to display

preset 5 onwards.

* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
To Change the Tune Mode
Select Settings.
Select Tune Mode.
Select All Channels or Within Category.
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does

not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).

This does not indicate a problem with your audio

system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,

which can take about a minute. Once they have

loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make

your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select the audio source icon on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
Tune Start:

When you change to a preset channel, a song being

played on that channel restarts from the beginning

with this function. This can be turned on or off by the

following procedure.

Select Settings.
Select Tune Start.
Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or

select More and then select Category List.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 303

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Preset Memory
To store a channel:

Tune to the selected channel.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.

Tune a station.
Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel.

3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create TuneMix.

u A message appears if there are no available presets.

1Preset Memory

 

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

TuneMix:

The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure.

Select Settings.
Select TuneMix.
Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select Replace Preset.

If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.

304

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.

Select Channel List.
Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
Select the channel.
1Listening to Featured Channels

 

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.

Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

To switch the sorting method, select Number, Name or Category on the upper right of the screen.

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

 

Features

Continued 305

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .

To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.

Returning to real-time broadcast
Select and hold .

1Replay Function

 

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

Audio/Information Screen

(A)

(D) (B)
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment

(C): Length stored in memory

(D): Play/Pause icon

306

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team
Select Settings.
Select Sports Notifications Setup.

3. Select Favorite Teams.

4. Select + Add Favorite Team.

5. Select a team.

To set up an alert message
Select Settings.
Select Sports Notifications Setup.
Select Notifications.
Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications.
Select Notifications.
Select On.
Select a favorite team.
1Live Sports Alert

 

The sports alert function is active during SiriusXM® mode only.

1To set up a favorite team

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.

 

Features

Continued 307

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.

Select Settings.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
Select Selected City.
Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Reset Location.

 

1Traffic and Weather Information

 

The traffic and weather information function is active during SiriusXM® mode only.

Features

308

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Channel Schedule
You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start.

To view a channel schedule
Select More.
Select Channel Schedule.

1Channel Schedule

 

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

 

To set up an alert message
Select More.
Select Channel Schedule.
Select a program.
Select Set Program Alert.
Select Just Once or Every Time.
Features

1To set up an alert message

The alert function is active during SiriusXM® mode

only.

Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next

time you turn the power mode to ON.

If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.

Continued 309

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Manage Program Alert
You can change settings for the alert function.

To enable the alert function
Select Settings.
Select Manage Program Alerts.

3. Select Notifications.

4. Select ON or OFF.

To remove an alert
Select Settings.
Select Manage Program Alerts.

3. Select Alerts Set.

4. Select on the alert you want to delete.

u A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select Delete.

310

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.

Select More.
Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure.

Select Settings.
Select Scan Mode.
Select Channel or Preset.
1Scan

The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.

The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

 

To turn off scan, select Stop.

Features

311

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD*
Playing a CD*

 

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

 

Features

 

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)

Knob

Push to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Icons

Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Audio/Information Screen

Play/Pause Icon

Disc Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.

(Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD*

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a CD*

 

Browse Screen

 

Track List Screen

If there is a folder(s) on a CD:

Select Browse.
Select Current Playlist, or Folders then a folder.
Select a track.
If there is no folder on a CD:

Select Track List.
Select a track.
NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances:

When you select a new folder, file, or track.
When you change the audio mode to CD.
When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 313

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD*
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.

Scan Select Scan.

u If there is a folder(s) on a CD, you can select Current folder or First Track in All Folders.

To turn off scan, select Stop.

Random/Repeat
Cycles through the modes as follows:

Random

(off)  (highlighted)

Repeat

(off) 

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Select Scan Mode, and then select the following: First Track in All Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Current folder: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.

Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.

314

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Ports P. 241

Cover Art

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Push to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Icons

Select or to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Audio/Information Screen

Play/Pause Icon

Features

 

Continued 315

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Select Browse.
Select the items on that menu.

1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 346
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.

316

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

Select or .

 

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order.

Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

 

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

Features

317

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Ports P. 241

Features

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Push to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track.

*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

318

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Select Browse.
Select the items on that menu.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 349
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

 

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 346
Features

Continued 319

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.

■ Random/Repeat

 

Select or .

 

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Random/Repeat

Random in Category: Plays all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Features

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

320

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music

Playing My Honda Music

 

My Honda Music plays audio files that have been imported from a USB flash drive.

Your audio system supports audio files in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format.

File Manager P. 286

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Push to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track.

Features

Continued 321

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
Features

 

How to Transfer an Audio File
Connect a USB device into the USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 241

 

2. Select More.

3. Select Import Files to My Honda Music.

u The File Manager screen is displayed.

Transfer an audio file to your audio system.
2 How to Transfer a File P. 286

How to delete an audio file
1. Select More.

2. Select Delete Files from My Honda Music. u The File Manager screen is displayed.

3. Delete an audio file.

2 How to Delete a File P. 289

1How to Transfer an Audio File

 

If there is no audio file in your audio system, the system will automatically proceed to step 3 after connecting a USB device.

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 349
322

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Select Browse.
Select the items on that menu.

1Playing My Honda Music

 

WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file.

 

Features

Continued 323

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.

■ Random/Repeat

 

Select or .

 

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Random/Repeat

Random in Category: Plays all files in the current category in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Features

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

324

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 481

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:

• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876.

• Canada: For more information on smartphone

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)

Knob

Push to turn the

audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust

the volume.

Audio/Information

Screen

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Random Icon*1

Select to play all files in

the current category in

random order.

Repeat Icon*1

Select to repeat the current

file.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change tracks.

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone will be unavailable. However, you can have a second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.

Features

 

*1: Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, this function may not be displayed.

Phone Setup P. 481
Continued 325

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 481

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file Select the play/pause icon.
Searching for Music
Select Browse.
Select a search category (e.g., Albums).

3. Select an item.

u The selection begins playing.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Device.

Phone Setup P. 481
1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

326

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist

Playing Social Playlist

 

The Honda CabinControlTM smartphone app allows users to share audio files from their devices to Social Playlist.

Unfortunately, the driver cannot select the audio files from the audio/information screen. The driver can play in order of their choice only if they individually select each song in the queue. The driver cannot rearrange the order of the playlist.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 334

1Playing Social Playlist

 

For more information, check the Honda CabinControl smartphone app instruction manual.

(Back) Icon

Select to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power)

Knob

Push to turn the

audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust

the volume.

Audio/Information

Screen

Remove Icon

Select to remove

the file from the

playlist.

Random Icon

Select to play all files in

random order.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current

file.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Features

 

Continued 327

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist
Features

 

How to Edit the Playlist
Select .
Select Social Playlist.

3. Select Queue.

To play a file on the playlist:

u Select the file.

To remove a file from the playlist:

u Select on the file.

To clear the playlist:

u Select Clear, and then select Request

Songs to reload a playlist.

To check the connected device:

u Select Device List.

328

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
HondaLink®

 

HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 334
Phone Setup P. 481
To Connect to HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.

To enable the HondaLink® service
You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink® service.

Disable: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never show again.)

1HondaLink®

The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to the audio system, HondaLink® can be accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.

 

Features

 

Continued 329

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
To link with HondaLink®
You may see the connection guide screen

 

after launching HondaLink® when there is no

connection available.

■ HondaLink® Menu

 

Features

 

Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.

330

Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.

A notification appears and notifies you of a

new message on the header area.

Notification

2. A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

Continued 331

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

Select the system status icon to see the messages.

Select a new message to open.
332

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Operator Assistance*
Connect to the HondaLink® operator when trying to find a destination or for

1Operator Assistance*

 

Remain attentive to road conditions and driving during operator assistance.

roadside assistance.

 

LINK

Button

Press the LINK button.
u Connection to the operator begins.

Talk to the operator.
u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the audio/information screen or press the button on the steering wheel.

If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the Operator Assistance.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select Subscription.
Select HondaLink Subscription Status.

Features

 

Audio/information screen

when connected to the

HondaLink® operator.

* Not available on all models 333

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features

 

Wi-Fi Connection

 

This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-Fi hotspot or communication device.

Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
Select .
Select Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Select Wi-Fi.

5. Select Change Mode.

Select Network or HotSpot, then Save. u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select
Network Options or HotSpot Options.

u Select the access point you want to connect to the system.

Select Connect.
u Enter a password for the access point,

 

and select OK.

u When the connection is successful, the

icon is displayed on the list.

 

Select to go back to the home screen.

1Wi-Fi Connection

 

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

1Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot

You cannot go through the setting procedure while the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.

In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

334

Audio System Basic OperationuAT&T Hotspot*
AT&T Hotspot*

 

If you have subscribed to AT&T hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to turn on/off vehicle data and monitor data usage left on your subscription.

AT&T Hotspot Menu

a Hotspot Enable

Turn on/off AT&T Hotspot.

b Data Usage Bar

Check the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T Hotspot can be added/modified at www.att.com/honda.

c Refresh and Plan Info

Refreshes screen to show data remaining.

Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.

d Edit Hotspot Properties

Shows the current username and password for vehicle Hotspot. Hotspot settings can be changed while the vehicle is not in motion.

Help
1AT&T Hotspot*

 

To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle is not subscribed to a data plan, you can visit www.att.com/honda to add vehicle data services.

Hotspot username and password can be changed in the Edit Hotspot Properties of the AT&T Hotspot app. Settings cannot be accessed while driving. Park in a safe place to adjust Hotspot settings.

Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to connect the vehicle and other mobile devices to the Internet.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 334
Features

 

* Not available on all models

335

Audio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Siri Eyes Free

 

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 481
Using Siri Eyes Free

1Siri Eyes Free

 

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

While driving we recommend only using Siri through the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free).

1Using Siri Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

Features

(Back) Button

Press to deactivate Siri.

(Talk) Button

Press and hold until the display changes as shown.

Appears when Siri is

activated in Siri Eyes Free

While in Siri Eyes Free:

The display remains the same.

No feedback or commands

appears.

336

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay

 

If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

USB Ports P. 241
Apple CarPlay Menu

1Apple CarPlay

 

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

Home screen

Apple CarPlay icon

Phone
Apple CarPlay menu screen

Select the Honda icon

to go back to the

home screen

Go back to the Apple

CarPlay menu screen

To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports located in the console compartment and on the back of the console compartment* will not enable Apple CarPlay operation.

USB Ports P. 241
While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 338
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or

Features

 

Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.

Phone Setup P. 481
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

* Not available on all models Continued 337

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features

 

Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.

Enabling Apple CarPlay
Enable: Allows this consent.

 

Disable: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.

1Apple CarPlay

 

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations

Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay:

Select HOMESettingsConnectionsApple CarPlay

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy.

338

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press and hold to activate Siri.

Press again to deactivate Siri.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

 

Below are examples of questions and commands for

Siri:

What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

Features

 

339

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Android Auto

 

When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

USB Ports P. 241
Auto Pairing Connection P. 342
1Android Auto

 

To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto.

Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports located in the console compartment and on the back of the console compartment* will not enable Android Auto operation.

USB Ports P. 241
To directly access the Android Auto phone function, press Phone on the home screen.

Auto Pairing Connection P. 342
When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.

Phone Setup P. 481
* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Android Auto Menu

6

: Go back to the home screen

Android Auto icon

a Maps (Navigation)

Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination.

b Phone (Communication)

Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

c Google Now (Home screen)

Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed.

1Android Auto

 

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations

Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

 

Continued 341

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

d Music and audio

Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto.

To switch between music apps, press this icon.

e Go back to the Home Screen.

Voice
Operate Android Auto with your voice.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Enabling Android Auto
Enable: Allows this consent.

 

Disable: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.

1Enabling Android Auto

 

Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup:

Select HOMESettingsConnectionsAndroid Auto

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

342

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

 

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:

Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Features

 

343

 

Features

Audio Error Messages

Models with Display Audio

 

CD Player*

 

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

Error Message

Cause

Solution

Problem ejecting disc from

the player. Contact Honda

Disc stuck in player

Contact a dealer and the player needs to be replaced.

dealer to fix this problem.

There is a problem with the

Focus error

Press the

(eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the

player. Eject and re-insert the

Unsupported disc error

error message is cleared.

disc. If this does not work, try

Mechanical error

Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the

another disc. If the error

Servo error

disc again.

continues, contact Honda

DRM file access

2 Protecting CDs P. 351

dealer.

Error file access

The system has overheated.

Try to reduce the

temperature by tuning the

High temperature

• Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

audio system off and

the error message is cleared.

allowing the player to cool

down.

 

* Not available on all models
uuAudio Error MessagesuCD Player*

Error Message

Cause

Solution

There is a problem with the

player. Eject and re-insert the

disc. If this does not work, try

Disc error

• Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.

another disc. If this error

2 Protecting CDs P. 351

continues contact Honda

dealer.

The system has overheated.

Try to reduce the

temperature by turning the

High temperature

• Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

audio system off and

the error message is cleared.

Features

allowing the player to cool

down.

345

 

Features

Audio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
iPod/USB Flash Drive

 

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

USB Error*1

Problem reading connected device. See

Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible

Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is

devices. If device is compatible, try

compatible with the audio system.

reconnecting device.

If this error remains, contact Honda

dealer.*2

Bad USB Device*1

Problem reading connected device. See

Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn

devices. If device is compatible, try

the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

reconnecting device.

error.

If this error remains, contact Honda

dealer.*2

Unsupported Ver*1

Problem reading connected device. See

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported

Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible

iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

devices. If device is compatible, try

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

reconnecting device.

device is connected, reconnect the device.

If this error remains, contact Honda

dealer.*2

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

346

Audio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Error Message

Solution

Problem reading connected device. See

Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible

devices. If device is compatible, try

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

reconnecting device.

If this error remains, contact Honda

dealer.*2

Unplayable File*1

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This

The selected file cannot be played on this

error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.

system*2

iPod

No Data*1

Appears when the iPod is empty.

The connected device does not contain any

USB flash drive

files that can be played on this system. See

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in

Owner’s Manual for a list of compatible file

the USB flash drive.

types.*2

iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

Features

 

347

 

Features

Audio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Models with Display Audio

 

Android/Apps

 

If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

 

Error Message

Solution

Unfortunately, **** has

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.

stopped.*1

App is not responding.

is not responding.Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
Would you like to closewaiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data

it?*1

Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 447

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

348

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service*

 

Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel to 0.
Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Channel not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.:

You are not subscribed to the channel selected.

Subscription Update:

SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

Channel Not Available:

No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable.

No Signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Check Tuner:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.

Check Antenna:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio

 

Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:

US: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:

In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle.
In tunnels
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Large items carried on the roof rack
Features

 

* Not available on all models

349

General Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs*
Features

 

Recommended CDs*

 

Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

 

CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs*

 

A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.

* Not available on all models
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs*

Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:

Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs

 

NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

Examples:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs
Bubbled/

With Label/

Using

Wrinkled

Sticker

Printer Label

Kit

Sealed

With Plastic Ring

● Damaged CDs

● Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/

Warped

Burrs

Cracked

Small CDs
3-inch (8-cm)

CD

Features

 

351

General Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features

 

Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility

Models with color audio system

Model

Made for iPod (5th generation)

Made for iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)

Made for iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)

Made for iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)

Made for iPod nano (1st to 6th generation) released between 2005 and 2010

Made for iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) released between 2007 and 2010

Made for iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s

Models with Display Audio

 

Model

Made for iPod nano (7th generation) released 2012

Made for iPod touch (5th and 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015 Made for iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus

Made for iPad Pro 9.7 inch/iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation)

Made for iPad 2/iPad (3rd generation)/iPad (4th generation)

Made for iPad Air/iPad Air 2

Made for iPad mini/iPad mini 2/iPad mini 3/iPad mini 4

1iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility

 

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5*1, iPhone 5c*1, iPhone 5s*1, iPhone 6*1, iPhone 6 Plus*1, iPhone 6s*1, iPhone 6s Plus*1, iPhone SE*1, iPhone 7*1, iPhone 7 Plus*1, iPad Pro 9.7 inch*1, iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation)*1, iPad (4th generation)*1, iPad Air*1, iPad Air 2*1, iPad mini*1, iPad mini 2*1, iPad mini 3*1, iPad mini 4*1, iPod nano (7th generation)*1, iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)*1.

The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 3G*2, iPhone 3GS*2, iPhone 4*2, iPhone 4s, iPad 2*1, iPad (3rd generation)*1, iPod (5th generation)*2, iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)*2, iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)*2, iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)*2, iPod nano (1st to 6th generation)*2, iPod touch (1st to 4th generation)*2.

*1: Models with Display Audio

*2: Models with color audio system

352

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

USB Flash Drives
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
*1: Models with Display Audio

*2: Models with color audio system

1iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility

 

USB works with iPhone 3G*2, iPhone 3GS*2, iPhone 4*2, iPhone 4s, iPhone 5*1,iPhone 5c*1, iPhone 5s*1, iPhone 6*1, iPhone 6 Plus*1, iPhone 6s*1, iPhone 6s Plus*1, iPhone SE*1, iPhone 7 *1, iPhone 7 Plus*1, iPad Pro 9.7 inch*1, iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation)*1, iPad 2*1, iPad (3rd generation)*1, iPad (4th generation)*1, iPad Air*1, iPad Air 2*1, iPad mini*1, iPad mini 2*1, iPad mini 3*1, iPad mini 4*1, iPod (5th generation)*2, iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)*2, iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)*2, iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)*2, iPod nano (1st to 6th generation)*2, iPod nano (7th generation)*1, iPod touch (1st to 4th generation)*2, iPod touch (5th to 6th generation)*1.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

Features

 

353

 

Features

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
354

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
Features

 

Continued 355

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations;
violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
356

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation

HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
Features

 

Continued 357

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
358

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
Features

 

Continued 359

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

E. Information Collection and Storage

Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
360

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.

Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
Features

 

Continued 361

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

362

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
Features

 

Continued 363

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.

YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

364

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.

This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

Features

 

365

 

Features

General Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Models with Display Audio

 

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

366

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

Features

 

367

 

Features

General Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
About Open Source Licenses

 

Models with Display Audio

 

To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

Select .
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select About.
Select Legal Information.

Models with color audio system

 

Project/Component Name: BT module/eCos

Homepage URL: http://ecos.sourceware.org/

License: GPL-2.0

License Link: http://ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html

License Text: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/

Notices: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/

Location of Corresponding Source: http://www.hondaopensource2.com/

368

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*

License Information*

 

DOLBY DIGITAL
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

 

DTS
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 369

General Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
Features

 

Bluetooth
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by DENSO CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

 

Windows Media
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

370

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*

Apple
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

Apple, the Apple Logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad Air, iPad mini, iPad Pro, Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

 

Features

 

Continued 371

General Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*
Features

 

MPEG
Mpeg4 Visual

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR

ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

VC-1

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to

encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/ VC-1 Video”) and/or
decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video.
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://www.mpegla.com.

372

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information*

AVC/H.264

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

SDHC Memory Card
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

Features

 

373

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*

Features

 

Rear seat passengers can enjoy a completely separate entertainment source than front passengers, including movies, games, and other audio choices.

1Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System *

 

Blu-ray DiscTM, Blu-rayTM, and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

BD-XL, BD-Live, Blu-ray 3D, and Ultra HD Blu-ray are not supported.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure The Rear Entertainment System remote complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines.

The Rear Entertainment System remote should be kept at least 7.9 inch (20 cm) or more away from a person’s body when operated.

* Not available on all models
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uWireless Headphones
Wireless Headphones

 

The rear seat passengers can listen to audio from the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system by a wireless headphone that comes with your vehicle.

1Wireless Headphones

 

Your vehicle comes with two wireless headphones.

Indicator

 

Volume

(Power) Button

To turn on the switch: Press the (power) button at the right earpiece. The indicator comes on.

To adjust the volume: Turn the dial at the right earpiece.

Wear the headphone correctly with the earpiece marked with L goes to your left ear and R goes to your right ear.

Wearing the headphone backward may affect the audio reception.

You can put the headphones into the front seat-back upper pockets, and the remote into the front passenger’s seat-back lower pocket as shown below.

 

Remote

DTS Headphone:XTM
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Headphone:X is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Headphone

Features

 

375

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uAuxiliary Console Panels
Auxiliary Console Panels

 

Headphone connectors for the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system are on the back of the center console compartment.

■ Headphone Connectors

 

A headphone can also be used by connecting

to the auxiliary console panel. There are two

headphone connectors for the rear

passengers. Each connector has its own

volume control.

 

Features

376

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uHDMITM Port

HDMITM Port

 

There is an HDMITM port on the back of the center console compartment. The Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system will accept HDMITM port from video games and video equipment which are equipped with an HDMITM port.

Open the cover and insert the cable.

 

Overhead Screen

 

Pull down the screen to the first or second detent until it latches.

 

1HDMITM Port

 

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

The HDMITM port is for use with the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system only.

Features

 

Overhead

Screen

377

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uOperating the System
Features

 

Operating the System

 

To operate the system, set the power mode to ON or ACCESSORY. Select Rear Entertainment, then Rear in the audio/information screen to turn on the system. You can also turn on the system by pressing the (power) button on the remote.

 

Rear Icon

Home Screen
To display the home screen on the overhead screen, press the (home) button on the remote. From this screen, you can use various apps or settings.

1Home Screen

 

To change the order of icons, press and hold the ENTER button on the remote.

378

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uVideo Accessibility

Video Accessibility

 

The Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System (RES) supports an accessibility function which allows the user to enable audio feedback of on-screen operations through the wireless and wired headphones.

 

Selecting the Accessibility Function
1. Press the (power) button on the RES remote.

 

Select Accessibility, then press the ENTER button on the remote.
The following selections are available:

Enable Accessibility: Turns the accessibility mode on or off. (Factory default: Off)
Speed of Audio Output: Adjusts to increase or decrease the speed of audio
output. (Factory default: Middle (8th) tick mark)

Enable 3 Key Push: Enables or disables the feature that allows you to turn a function on or off, or change a function setting without going through the menu. (Factory default: On)
1Selecting the Accessibility Function

 

Since the accessibility function is set to OFF by default, you must set it to ON before using it.

You can also select Accessibility from the Settings screen.

System Settings P. 385
To change the position of the Video Accessibility icon, press and hold the ENTER button on the RES remote, then drag the icon to the desired location.

Features

 

Continued 379

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uVideo Accessibility
Changing Function Status
Press any of the following colored buttons on the RES remote three times to turn a function on or off, or to change a function setting. Red button: Accessibility

Green button: Subtitles

Yellow button: Secondary Audio

Blue button: Audio Format Switching

 

Features

380

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying a DVD/Blu-rayTM

Playing a DVD/Blu-rayTM

 

To play a DVD or Blu-rayTM, insert a DVD or Blu-rayTM into the lower slot of the front audio system, and select Rear in the audio/information screen.

u The system automatically starts the DVD or Blu-rayTM. DVD or Blu-rayTM is available for the rear seat passenger only.

System Controls

(Power) Button

Press to turn the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system on or off.

(Home) Button

Press to display the home screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display or operation.

Red/Green/Yellow/Blue Button

Press to use on a DVD or Blu-rayTM menu.

(Play/Pause) Button

Press to pause or play a DVD or Blu-rayTM.

/ Buttons

Press to change chapters.

3 , 4, , and ENTER Buttons

Use 3, 4, , or to highlight a menu item, and press the ENTER button to make a selection.

(Light) Button

Press to illuminate the buttons for a few seconds.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Stop) Button

Press to stop a DVD or Blu-rayTM.

Features

 

Continued 381

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying a DVD/Blu-rayTM
Features

 

Rear DVD or Blu-rayTM Menu
Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
Select an item and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
The following items are available:

DVD Menu/Blu-ray Menu: Displays the top menu of the DVD or Blu-rayTM.
Aspect Ratio: Selects an aspect ratio of the image.
Setting the Aspect Ratio P. 382
Brightness: Adjusts the screen’s brightness.
Contrast: Adjusts the screen’s contrast.
Root Menu*1: Displays the disc menu for the current playing title.
Pop-up Menu*2: Displays the menu of the Blu-rayTM.
Player Options: Displays while a DVD or Blu-rayTM is playing and changes the DVD or Blu-rayTM preferences.
Setting the Player Options P. 383
Setting the Aspect Ratio
Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
Select Aspect Ratio.
Select the setting you want.
u You can select the three options; normal, full, or zoom.

1Rear DVD or Blu-rayTM Menu

 

During DVD or Blu-rayTM operation, when the source is changed or the audio system is turned off, DVD or Blu-rayTM operation stops.

Depending on the disc you insert, some items may not be displayed.

*1: Appears only when you select the DVD source.

*2: Appears only when you select the Blu-rayTM source.

382

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying a DVD/Blu-rayTM

Setting the Player Options
Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
Select Player Options.
Select an item and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
The following items are available:

Repeat:
Off: Repeat mode is off.

Title (only for DVD-V, AVCREC and BDAV): Repeats the current title.

Chapter (only for DVD-V, AVCREC and BDAV): Repeats the current chapter.

Program (only for DVD-VR): Repeats the current program if the disc has the correspondence list.

Playlist (only for DVD-VR): Repeats the current playlist if the disc has the correspondence list.

Entry Point (only for DVD-VR): Repeats the current entry point if the disc has the correspondence list.

Subtitles and Audio: Selects the language of the DVD subtitle and audio.
Angle: Selects the angle of the scene shot with multiple cameras.
Search: Skips to a title or chapter.
Searching a title/chapter/program/playlist P. 384
Change Order (only for DVD-VR, AVCREC and BDAV): Changes the order of the program or playlist.
Default Language: Selects the language for the menus, audio, and subtitle of the DVD or Blu-rayTM.
Sound Leveling: Adjusts the range of the loud and soft sound. Select Auto, On or Off.
Secondary Audio (only for BDMV): Turns on and off the function that plays the available commentary or narrator audio along with the main disc track.
Onscreen Remote: Displays the on-screen buttons for the remote.
Features

 

Continued 383

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying a DVD/Blu-rayTM
Features

 

Searching a title/chapter/program/playlist
Press the MENU button on the remote to display the menu screen.
Select Player Options.
Select Search.
Enter a number of a title, chapter, program or playlist to skip, and then select enter.
The following items are available:

Title: Skips to a title you specify.
Chapter: Skips to a chapter you specify.
Program (only for DVD-VR): Skips to a program you specify while playing with the program list.
Playlist (only for DVD-VR): Skips to a playlist you specify while playing with the playlist.
384

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying a DVD/Blu-rayTM
System Settings
Press the (home) button on the remote.
Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the Settings screen.
Select an item.
The following items are available:

Display: Adjusts the screen’s preferences.
2 Adjusting the screen P. 386

Language: Sets the system language used on all screens.
2 Setting the Language P. 386

Headphones: Sets the surround of the wireless headphones.
2 Setting the Headphones P. 386

Accessibility: With On selected, the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system provides audio feedback through the headphones to assist the user with on-screen operations.
About My System: Displays the information of the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system.
System Reset: Resets the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system settings and erases all login information.
After you make all the adjustments, press the (back) or (home) button to return.

Features

 

Continued 385

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying a DVD/Blu-rayTM
Features

 

Adjusting the screen
Press the (home) button on the remote.
Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the Settings screen.
Select Display and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
Select the setting you want.
The following items are available:

Brightness: Adjusts the screen’s brightness.
Contrast: Adjusts the screen’s contrast.
Tint: Adjusts the screen’s hue.
Color: Adjusts the screen’s color strength.
Setting the Language
Press the (home) button on the remote.
Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the Settings screen.
Select Language and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
Select the setting you want.
u You can select the language from US English, UK English, Spanish, Canadian French, Arabic, or Korean.

Setting the Headphones
Press the (home) button on the remote.
Select Settings and then press the ENTER button on the remote to display the Settings screen.
Select Headphones and then press the ENTER button on the remote.
Select the setting you want.
u You can select the options from Off or On. Select Off to disable the feature.

386

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uFront Control Panel Operation

Front Control Panel Operation

 

You can operate the Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System (RES) from the audio/ information screen.

Selecting the App using Front Control Panel
Select .
Select Rear Entertainment.

3. Select Rear if the power is off.

u If you select this icon while the system is

operating, the system is turned off.

Select Rear Apps.
Select the app you want to use.
The following items are available on the audio/information screen:

Rear: Turns the system on or off.
Now Playing: Displays the current playing app.
Rear Apps: Displays the home screen.
CabinTalk: Displays the CabinTalk screen.
CabinTalkTM * P. 502
Remote: Disables controls from the remote.
Settings: Changes the system settings.
Rear System Setup P. 388
Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 387

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uFront Control Panel Operation
Rear System Setup

Features

Manage Apps
Shows or hides app icons on the home screen.

Select .
Select Rear Entertainment.
Select Rear Apps.
Select Settings.
Select Manage Apps.
Select Available or Hidden.
Select Save.

388

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uFront Control Panel Operation

Setting the DVD or Blu-rayTM Menu
Select Options while a DVD or Blu-rayTM is playing.

 

The following items are available on the audio/information screen:

Subtitles and Audio
Setting the Player Options P. 383
Repeat
Setting the Player Options P. 383
Change Order
Setting the Player Options P. 383
Autoplay: Turns on and off to automatically play a DVD or Blu-rayTM disc.
1Setting the DVD or Blu-rayTM Menu

 

Depending on the disc you insert, some items may not be displayed.

Features

 

389

 

Features

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying Apps

Playing Apps

 

You can play apps such as USB, iPod, HDMI® and more from the rear seats. 1Playing Apps

 

Streaming Applications

Your vehicle’s Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system

comes pre-loaded with audio and video streaming

applications.

Before launching any application, first confirm that

your vehicle’s date and time are set correctly. Having

the incorrect date and time settings may prevent your

applications from operating correctly.

You can set the date and time on the front display in

the following steps.

Select HomeSettingsDate & TimeSet Date &

Time

Your vehicle is equipped with the ability to apply

software updates. When a software update is

provided to your vehicle, please accept the update

and allow the installation to complete.

Disclaimer:

The video and audio quality of your streaming

applications will depend on your internet connection.

If you experience lagging or disconnections, check

your connection and confirm it is operational.

390

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying Apps

System Controls

(Power) Button

Press to turn the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system on or off.

(Home) Button

Press to display the home screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display or operation.

(Play/Pause) Button

Press to pause or play a video or audio file.

/ Buttons

Press to change videos or audio files.

3 , 4, , and ENTER Buttons

Use 3, 4, , or to highlight a menu item, and press the ENTER button to make a selection.

(Light) Button

Press to illuminate the buttons for a few seconds.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Stop) Button

Press to stop a video or audio file.

Features

 

Continued 391

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying Apps
Features

 

Playing a Disc in the Rear
To play a disc, press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the Blu-ray Disc icon on the overhead screen.

When you press the MENU button on the remote while the CD is playing, the audio menu appears on the overhead screen.

The available options appear on the overhead screen are repeat, random, brightness, and contrast.

Playing an iPod and a USB Flash Drive in the Rear
To play an iPod and a USB flash drive, press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the USB icon on the overhead screen.

When you press the MENU button on the remote while the iPod or USB flash drive is playing, the audio menu appears on the overhead screen.

The available options appear on the overhead screen are repeat, random, aspect ratio, brightness, and contrast.

1System Controls

 

You can also operate the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system on the audio/information screen.

392

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying Apps

Playing a Video Using the HDMITM
To play videos from an HDMITM-compatible device, connect the device using an HDMITM cable.

HDMITM Port P. 377
Press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the HDMI icon on the overhead screen.

When you press the MENU button on the remote while the video using the HDMITM is playing, the audio menu appears on the overhead screen.

The available options appear on the overhead screen are aspect ratio, brightness, and contrast.

Features

 

Continued 393

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlaying Apps
Features

 

How Much Farther?TM*
Displays the current location temperature, time remaining, distance traveled, and distance remaining with an animation.

To play the app, press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the How Much Farther? icon on the overhead screen.

You can select a background from five types using or on the remote, and bring some items (at top of the screen) up and down using 3 or 4 .

Media Servers
Plays a stored video or audio file from a connected device via Wi-Fi.

Connect the device using Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 334
Press the (home) button on the remote, and then select the Media Servers icon on the overhead screen.

1How Much Farther?TM*

 

When there is no destination set on the navigation system, an animated demonstration will be displayed.

1Media Servers

NOTE: For this feature to work, an app that exposes your device as a media server must be installed on your device. Open this app on your device prior to selecting the Media Servers icon. This feature is only supported on Android phones.

The operation are the same as the USB mode.

* Not available on all models
Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uAudio Sources for Front and Rear Seats
Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats

 

The table shows the possible audio source combinations of the front audio system and Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system’s simultaneous use.

Front

AM/FM

SiriusXM®

CD

USB

Rear

Radio

Radio

DVD*1

iPod

Blu-rayTM*1

CD

DVD*1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Blu-rayTM*1

USB

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

iPod

HDMITM*1

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

*1:The front seat passengers are only able to hear the DVD’s, Blu-rayTM’s or HDMITM’s sound from the front speakers.

1Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats

 

Yes: These audio sources are simultaneously playable. When listening to the same source in both the front and rear, the playing channel or track will also be the same for each.

No: These audio sources are not simultaneously playable.

Features

 

395

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

Playable Discs

 

The discs that come with these labels can be played in your vehicle’s Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system.

Also look for the region code of 1, ALL, or on the package or jacket on the disc.

 

DVD-ROMs and Blu-rayTM ROMs (BD ROM) are not playable in this unit.

 

The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

Also includes:

1Playable Discs

 

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“Blu-ray DiscTM”, “Blu-ray TM”, and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

396

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs

Java
Oracle, Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

 

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

BEFORE USING THIS IN-CAR BLU-RAY PRODUCT, PLEASE READ ALL OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS END USER LICESE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”) CAREFULLY. THIS AGREEMENT IS A LEGALLY BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN END USER (“you”) AND PANASONIC THAT SETS FORTH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THAT GOVERN YOUR USE OF ORACLE JAVA ME MEDIA PACK FOR CDC (the “program”) IMPLEMENTED IN THIS IN-CAR BLU-RAY PRODUCT.

Java Technology Restrictions. You are prohibited from creating, modifying, changing the behavior of classes, interfaces, or subpackages that are in any way identified as “Java”, “Javax”, “Sun” or similar convention as specified by Oracle in any naming convention designation.
Trademarks and Logos. You shall acknowledge that Oracle owns the Java trademark and all Java-related trademarks, logos and icons including the Coffee Cup and Duke (“Java Marks”) and shall agree to: (a) comply with the Java Trademark Guidelines at http://www.oracle.com/us/legal/third-party-trademarks/index.html; (b) not do anything harmful to or inconsistent with Oracle’s rights in the Java Marks; and (c) assist Oracle in protecting those rights, including assigning to Oracle any rights acquired by you in any Java Mark.
Third Party Code. You shall read additional copyright notices and license terms applicable to portions of the programs are set forth below.
Features

 

Continued 397

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

COMPONENTS

The following software (or certain identified files distributed with the software) may be included in this product. Unless otherwise specified, the software identified in this file is licensed under the licenses described below. The disclaimers and copyright notices provided are based on information made available to Oracle by the third party licensors listed.

3DES

3DES

Des3Cipher – the triple-DES encryption method

Copyright (C) 1996 by Jef Poskanzer <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Visit the ACME Labs Java page for up-to-date versions of this and other fine Java utilities: http:www.acme.com/java/

398

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
AES

Cryptix General License

Copyright (c) 1995-2005 The Cryptix Foundation Limited. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.

IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Features

 

Continued 399

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

DES

DES

DesCipher – the DES encryption method

The meat of this code is by Dave Zimmerman <[email protected]>, and is: Copyright (c) 1996 Widget Workshop, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for NON-COMMERCIAL or COMMERCIAL purposes and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright notice is kept intact.

WIDGET WORKSHOP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. WIDGET WORKSHOP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING, MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS DERIVATIVES.

THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE AS ON-LINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). WIDGET WORKSHOP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.

@@ The rest of the code is:

Copyright (C) 1996 by Jef Poskanzer <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.

400

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Visit the ACME Labs Java page for up-to-date versions of this and other fine Java utilities: http:www.acme.com/java/

JPEG library

The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy.

This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.

Features

 

Continued 401

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

zlib 1.1.3

@@ Acknowledgments:

Oracle gratefully acknowledges the contributions of Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler in creating the zlib general purpose compression library which is used in this product.

@@ Copyright notice:

(C) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler

This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler

[email protected] [email protected]

If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code.

402

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs

If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes.

(4) Others.

(i)You shall not install the programs separately and independently from this Blu-ray product.

(ii)You agree not to reply on the future availability of any programs or services which Oracle will provide.

(5) ENTIRE AGREEMENT

You agree that this Agreement is the complete agreement pertaining to the subject matter hereof (including references to information contained in a URL) and this Agreement supersedes all prior or contemporaneous written or oral agreements or representations existing between you and Panasonic with respect to such subject matter. If any term of this Agreement is found to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions will remain effective. Panasonic’s failure to enforce any right or provisions in this Agreement will not constitute a

 

waiver of such provision, or any other provision of this Agreement.

Features

Continued 403

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

HDMI
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

Cinavia
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted.

More information about Cinavia technology is provided at Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.

This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2014 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

404

uuBlu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs

MPEG
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to

encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or
decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video.
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.

Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://www.mpegla.com.

Features

 

Continued 405

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

OSS
This product incorporates the following software:

The software developed by, or developed for, Panasonic Corporation (“Panasonic”),
The software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,
The software licensed under the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2 (“GPL”),
The software licensed under the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2.1 (“LGPL”), and/or
Open sourced software licensed under terms and conditions other than GPL or LGPL.
For the software classified as (3) or (4) above, please refer to the terms and conditions of GPL and LGPL at the websites listed below:

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html

The software classified as (3) and (4) above are copyrighted by multiple people. Please refer to the websites below regarding the copyright notices of those people.

http://www.hondaopensource2.com/17M_BDP/

At least three (3) years from delivery of products, Panasonic will give to any third party who contacts us at the Contact Information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code corresponding to the GPL/LGPL Software.

Please note that we are unable to answer any queries regarding source code details, etc.

[Contact Information]

Engineering Administration Group Manager Panasonic Corporation, Automotive Systems Company, 4261 Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku, Yokohama, Kanagawa 224-8520, Japan

Furthermore, source code corresponding to the GPL/LGPL Software listed above is freely available to you and any member of the public at the websites listed below:

http://www.hondaopensource2.com/17M_BDP/

The software classified as (5) above contains various open sourced software (“OSS”) including the following software:

406

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
OpenSSL

LICENSE ISSUES

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]

OpenSSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”

The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]
Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

Features

 

Continued 407

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

408

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])”

The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License.]

Features

 

Continued 409

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

portmap

Copyright (c) 1998, Regents of the University of California All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the University of California, Berkeley nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

410

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
tcp_wrappers

Copyright (c) 1998, Regents of the University of California All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the name of the University of California, Berkeley nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Features

 

Continued 411

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

FreeType

Portions of this software are copyright (c) 1996-2002, 2006 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

Legal Terms

0. Definitions

Throughout this license, the terms ‘package’, ‘FreeType Project’, and ‘FreeType archive’ refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the ‘FreeType Project’, be they named as alpha, beta or final release.

‘You’ refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where ‘using’ is a generic term including compiling the project’s source code as well as linking it to form a ‘program’ or ‘executable’. This program is referred to as ‘a program using the FreeType engine’.

This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this.

The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below.

1. No Warranty

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

412

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
2. Redistribution

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions:

Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (‘FTL.TXT’) unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files.
Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn’t mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.

3. Advertising

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission.

We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: ‘FreeType Project’, ‘FreeType Engine’, ‘FreeType library’, or ‘FreeType Distribution’.

As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

Features

 

Continued 413

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

4. Contacts

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:

[email protected] Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven’t found anything to help you in the documentation.
[email protected] Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at:
http://www.freetype.org

libjpeg

this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group

Vera.ttf

Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying this license (“Fonts”) and associated documentation files (the “Font Software”), to reproduce and distribute the Font Software, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Font Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies of one or more of the Font Software typefaces.

The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be modified and additional glyphs or characters may be added to the Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not containing either the words “Bitstream” or the word “Vera”.

414

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Software that has been modified and is distributed under the “Bitstream Vera” names.

The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger software package but no copy of one or more of the Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself.

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the names of Gnome, the Gnome Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Font Software without prior written authorization from the Gnome Foundation or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information, contact: fonts at gnome dot org.

libtiff

Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler

Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.

Features

 

Continued 415

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

giflib

The GIFLIB distribution is Copyright (c) 1997 Eric S. Raymond

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

416

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
zlib

zlib License

This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
FDA
-Caution-

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Features

 

Continued 417

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Features

 

Playable Disc Types
This unit is compatible with NTSC and PAL color TV systems. Use discs that are labeled as NTSC or PAL. Capability of this unit to play discs other than NTSC or PAL TV system (SECAM) is not guaranteed.

Type and symbol

Size/Playable Side

Max. play time

of playable disc

<MPEG 2 standard>

12 cm/single-sided

Single layer

133 min.

Dual layer

242 min.

12 cm/Double-sided

Single layer

266 min.

Dual layer

484 min.

12 cm/signal-side

Single layer

at 27 Mbps 123 min.

Dual layer

246 min.

 

Playable Disc Region Codes
Some DVD/Blu-rayTM discs have a region code such as , , and this number shows the region the disc can be played in. Playable disc regions are restricted depending on the map coverage areas. If you play other discs, Check Disc message is displayed. In addition, some discs that do not have a region code number may still have a region restriction and may not be played on this unit.

 

1Playable Disc Types

 

Some discs may not function as expected. Also read the instruction book which comes with the disc.

Disc Symbols

The following symbols appear on DVD/Blu-rayTM discs or packing.

Symbol

Description

Number of available soundtracks

Number of available subtitles

Number of angles

Selectable screen aspect ratios

(TV screen’s horizontal to vertical ratio)

16:9: Widescreen

4:3: Normal screen

Selectable region codes

ALL: Region free

A number (ex. 1): Particular region code

Selectable region codes

ABC: Region free

An alphabet (ex. A): Particular region code

For Dual Disc (double sided disc with both a DVD layer and a non-DVD layer), the DVD layer can be played as a Video DVD if the disc has the mark

displayed on the right. Discs without the mark and the non-DVD layer are not supported, and operation cannot be guaranteed. In addition, the discs may be scratched when they are inserted or ejected.

418

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uPlayable Discs
Recommended Discs
Compression video not supported, Compression audio specification are following.

CD-R/CD-RW

Media

DVD-R/DVD-RW

DVD+R/DVD+RW

CD-ROM Mode1

Disc format

CD-ROM Mode2 Form1

DVD-ROM

File format

ISO9660 Level 1 & 2

Romeo, Joliet

Audio format

MP3

WMA

AAC

Audio format

MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3

Microsoft Windows Media

MPEG4-AAC

MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3

m4a files created by iTunes

specification

Audio Ver7,8,9

MPEG-2.5 AUDIO LAYER3

(Apple)

8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/

Sampling

MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48

32/44.1/48

8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/

frequency

MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24

32/44.1/48

[kHz]

MPEG-2.5: 8/11.025/12

Exceptions not supported by

DVD Player:12/24

MPEG1: 32/40/48/56/64/

8/16/20/24/28/32/40/48/56/

80/96/112/128/160/192/

5/8/16/24/32/40/48/64/80/

64/80/96/112/128/160/192/

224/256/320

96/128/160/192/224/256/

224/256/320/384/448/512/

MPEG2: 8/16/24/32/40/48/

320/384

576

Bit rate [kbps]

56/64/80/96/112/128/144/

160

Exceptions not supported by

Exceptions not supported by

MPEG2.5: 8/16/24/32/40/

48/56/64/80/96/112/128/

DVD Player: 24/224/384

DVD Player: 384/448/512/

144/160

576

File extension

.mp3/.MP3

.wma/.WMA

.m4a/.M4A

1Recommended Discs

 

Large files may take longer to change audio or fast-forward/fast-rewind.

Some CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW may not be read due to the discs’ encoding properties. Use discs recorded with disc-at-once or track-at-once for this unit.

“AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and SEC.

Features

 

419

 

Features

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uDVD or Blu-rayTM Player Error Messages
DVD or Blu-rayTM Player Error Messages

 

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

 

Error Message in Audio/

Error Message in Overhead

Cause

Solution

Information Screen

Screen

Problem ejecting disc from the

Problem ejecting disc from the

player.

Contact a dealer and the

player. Contact Honda dealer to

Disc stuck in player

fix this problem.

Contact Honda dealer to fix this

player needs to be replaced.

problem.

There is a problem with the

Focus error

Press the

button and

remove the disc, and check

Unsupported disc error

player. Eject and re-insert the

There seems to be a problems

that the error message is

Mechanical error

disc. If this does not work, try

playing this disc. Try inserting

cleared.

Servo error

another disc. If the error

the disc into the Blu-ray player

Check that the disc is not

DRM file access

continues, contact Honda

again.

Error file access

damaged or deformed, and

dealer.

insert the disc again.

Device error

2 Protecting CDs P. 351

The system has overheated. Try

The Blu-ray player is too hot

Turn the audio system off and

to reduce the temperature by

right now.

allow the player to cool down

tuning the audio system off

High temperature

Give it some time to cool off

until the error message is

and allowing the player to cool

and try again later.

cleared.

down.

Playback stopped. The content

Playback stopped. The content

being played is protected by

CinaviaTM and is not authorized

Current track/file will be

being played is protected by

for playback on this device.

Cinavia 1 error

skipped. The next supported

Cinavia and is not authorized

For more information, see

track/file plays automatically.

for playback on this device.

http://www.cinavia.com.

Message Code 1.

420

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment System*uDVD or Blu-rayTM Player Error Messages
Error Message in Audio/

Error Message in Overhead

Cause

Solution

Information Screen

Screen

Audio outputs temporarily

Audio outputs temporarily

muted. Do not adjust the

muted. Do not adjust the

playback volume. The content

playback volume. The content

being played is protected by

being played is protected by

Current track/file will be

Cinavia and is not authorized

CinaviaTM and is not authorized

Cinavia 3 error

skipped. The next supported

for playback on this device. For

for playback on this device. For

track/file plays automatically.

more information, see

more information, see

http://www.cinavia.com.

http://www.cinavia.com.

Message Code 3.

Message Code 3.

This disc cannot be played.

Press the

button and

Check that the disc is not

There seems to be a problem

remove the disc, and check

damaged or deformed. If the

with this disc.

Region mismatch

that the error message is

disc is OK, see Owner’s Manual

Please check if it might be

cleared.

for information on supported

damaged.

Check the disk if region code is

disc types and files.

matched.

Cannot access Blu-ray Player.

DTCP certificate error

Contact a dealer and the

Contact Honda dealer.

player needs to be replaced.

 

Features

 

421

Customized Features

Features

 

Models with color audio system

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup.

 

Audio/Information Screen

(Phone) Button

MENU/CLOCK Button

Selector Knob

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P.

1How to customize

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

422

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

 

Adjust Clock

RDS Information

Settings

RDS Settings

Radio Text

Add New Device

Bluetooth Setup

Connect an Audio Device

Brightness

Display Adjustment

Contrast

Black Level

Camera Guideline

Rear Camera

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

 

Features

 

Continued 423

Customized Featuresu

Features

Display Change

Audio

Wallpaper

Select

Wallpaper

Import

Delete

Blue

Color Theme

Red

Amber

Gray

Language

12h

Clock Format

24h

 

424

Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

 

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Connect a Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Disconnect All Devices

Delete Device

Pass-Key

Speed Dial

Ringtone

Fixed

Mobile Phone

Caller ID Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

System Clear

 

Customized Featuresu

Features

Continued 425

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

List of customizable options
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Adjust Clock

Adjusts clock.

2 Clock P. 136

RDS Information

Selects whether the RDS information comes

On*1/Off

RDS

on.

Settings

Radio Text

Displays the radio text information of the

selected RDS station.

Bluetooth

Add New Device

Connect an Audio

See Bluetooth Setup on

P. 428

Setup

Device

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/

information screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/

Settings

Adjustment

information screen.

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/

information screen.

Camera Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines come on the

On*1/Off

audio/information screen.

Brightness

Rear

Contrast

See Display Adjustment on P. 426

Black Level

Camera

Color

Changes the color of the audio/information

screen.

Tint

Changes the tint of the audio/information

screen.

*1:Default Setting

426

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Display Change

Changes the display type.

Audio*1/Wallpaper

Select

Changes the wallpaper type.

Clock*1/Image1/Image2/

Image3

Wallpaper

Import

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 250

Settings

Delete

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Image1*1/Image2/Image3

Color Theme

Changes the background color of the audio/

Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray

information screen.

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/Spanish

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12h to

12h*1/24h

24h.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 427

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Add New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 457

Connect a Phone

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone

to HFL.

Bluetooth

2 Phone Setup P. 457

Setup

Connect an Audio

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

Device

Phone

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Setup

Delete Device

Deletes a paired phone.

Pass-Key

Changes a pairing code.

Features

Ringtone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile Phone*1

Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 466

Caller ID Info

Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number

Name Priority*1/Number

as the caller ID.

Priority

System Clear

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Phone Setup group as default.

*1:Default Setting

428

Customized Features

Models with Display Audio

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.

 

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P.

 

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Continued 429

Customized Featuresu
Customization flow
Select .

 

Select Settings.

 

Date & Time

 

Set Date & Time

 

Set Time Zone

 

Select Time Format

 

Automatic Date &

 

Time

Set Date

 

Set Time

 

Automatic Time

 

Zone*

Select time zone

 

Features

System

 

System Volumes

System Sounds

Navigation Guidance*

Touch

Sensitivity

Subscriptions

HondaLink Subscription Status

 

Language

Factory Data

Reset

About

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu

Advanced

Options

 

App Manager

 

Recent Location

 

Request from Apps

Location Setting

 

Interruptions

Interruption Mode

 

Events and

 

reminders

Calls

 

Messages

 

Calls/messages

 

from

Features

 

Continued 431

Customized Featuresu

Connections

 

Bluetooth

 

Wi-Fi

Connect New Device Saved Devices

Change Mode

 

Connected Devices

 

Features

 

Android Auto

Apple CarPlay

CabinControl

Options

 

(Device list)

 

CabinControl

 

Connection

 

Information

432

Customized Featuresu

Vehicle

 

Driving Position Setup*

 

Meter Setup

Power Tailgate

 

Setup*

Keyless Access

Setup

Seat Position Movement at Entry/Exit

 

Memory Position Link

 

Adjust Outside Temp Display

 

Trip A Reset Timing

Trip B Reset Timing

Reverse Shift Position Beep

Auto Idle Stop Display

Adjust Alarm Volume

Turn by Turn Display

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Power Tailgate Keyless Open Mode Power Tailgate Open by Outer Handle Hands Free Access Power Tailgate*

 

Door Unlock Mode

 

Keyless Access Light Flash

Keyless Access Beep

Remote Start System On/Off

Walk Away Auto Lock

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 433

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Driver Assist

 

System Setup

Door Setup

 

Lighting Setup

 

Wireless

 

Charger*

Maintenance

Information

Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Blind Spot Information*

 

Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key and Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer

 

Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight On with Wiper On Auto Light Sensitivity*

 

Oil Life

 

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu

Camera

 

Display

 

Sound

 

Notifications

 

* Not available on all models

Rear Camera

 

LaneWatch*

 

Brightness

 

Contrast

 

Black Level

 

Bass / Treble

 

Center /

 

Subwoofer

Volume*

Subwoofer

 

Volume*

Balance / Fader

 

Audio Zones*

 

Speed Volume

 

Compensation

DTS Neural

 

Surround*

Default Camera View

 

Guidelines

 

Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Show with Turn Signal

 

Show Reference Line

 

Features

Continued 435

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

List of customizable options
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Automatic

Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust

Date &

ON*1/OFF

the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

Time

Set

Date &

Set Date

Adjusts date.

Time

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 136

Set Time

Adjusts clock.

System

Date & Time

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 136

Automatic

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust

Set

the clock when driving through different time

ON*1/OFF

Time Zone

*

zones.

Time

Zone

Select time

Changes the time zone manually.

zone

Select Time Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

System

System Sounds

Changes the system sounds volume.

Navigation

Volumes

Changes the navigation guidance volume.

Guidance*

Touch

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Sensitivity

Subscriptions

HondaLink

Lists subscriptions and subscription status for

Subscription Status

HondaLink®.

System

English (United

States)*1/English

Language

Changes the display language.

(United Kingdom)/

Korean/French/

Spanish/Arabic

Factory Data

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

Continue/Cancel

Reset

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 447

About

Displays the Android setting items.

 

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 437

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

App Manager

Displays the Android system memory and apps

information.

Recent Location

Displays the recent location requests from apps.

Request from Apps

Location Setting

Selects OFF not to allow apps including the

ON*1/OFF

navigation system* to access the vehicle’s location.

 

Features

Advanced

System

Options

Inter-

Always interrupt*1/

Sets the interruption mode for allowing to notify

Don’t interrupt/

ruption

when calls and notifications arrive.

Allow only priority

Mode

interruptions

Events and

Sets priority interruptions of events and reminders.

ON*1/OFF

Inter-

reminders

ruptions

Calls

Sets priority interruptions of calls.

ON*1/OFF

Messages

Sets priority interruptions of messages.

ON*1/OFF

Calls/

Anyone*1/Contacts

messages

Sets priority interruptions of from who.

only/Starred

from

contacts only

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

+ Connect New

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

Device

2 Phone Setup P. 481

Bluetooth

Saved Devices

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 481

Change Mode

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

Network*1/HotSpot/

OFF

Wi-Fi

Available Networks/

Displays the available network(s) or current

Connec-

Connected Devices

connected device(s).

tions

Android Auto

Sets up the Android Auto connection.

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.

Cabin-

Turns the Honda CabinControl function on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Control

Options

CabinControl

Connection

Displays the Honda CabinControl connection

Information

information.

(Device list)

Selects functions or deletes a device.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 439

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

440

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Seat Position

Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out

Driving

Movement at Entry/

ON*1/OFF

of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature.

Exit

Position

Setup*

Memory Position

Turns the driving position memory system on and

ON*1/OFF

Link

off.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Adjust Outside Temp

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

(U.S.)

Display

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C

(Canada)

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A

With Refuel/IGN

Vehicle

Trip A Reset Timing

Off/Manually

and average fuel economy A.

Reset*1

Meter Setup

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B

With Refuel/IGN

Trip B Reset Timing

Off/Manually

and average fuel economy B.

Reset*1

Reverse Shift

Turns the reverse alert tone on and off.

ON/OFF*1

Position Beep

Auto Idle Stop

Selects whether the Auto Idle Stop display comes

ON/OFF*1

Display

on or not.

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Turn by Turn Display

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on

ON*1/OFF

during the route guidance.

Meter Setup

Fuel Efficiency

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Backlight

Power Tailgate

Changes the keyless setting for when the power

Anytime*1/When

Keyless Open Mode

tailgate opens.

Unlocked

Power

Power Tailgate Open

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by

Off (Manual only)/

On (Power/

Tailgate

by Outer Handle

tailgate outer handle.

Manual)*1

Vehicle

Setup*

Hands Free Access

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a

swift forward in and out kicking motion under the

ON*1/OFF

Power Tailgate*

rear bumper.

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

Driver Door or

driver’s door handle.

Tailgate*1/All Doors

Keyless Access

Keyless Access Light

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you

ON*1/OFF

Setup

Flash

unlock/lock the doors.

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock

ON*1/OFF

the doors.

 

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 441

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Remote Start System

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

On/Off

Keyless Access

Changes the settings for the automatic locking the

Setup

Walk Away Auto

Enable/Disable*1

doors when you walk away from the vehicle while

Lock

carrying the remote.

Forward Collision

Changes at which distance CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/

Warning Distance

Short

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system

Vehicle

detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of

ON/OFF*1

Detect Beep

the ACC range.

Driver Assist

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure

Normal*1/Wide/

System Setup

Mitigation Setting

mitigation system.

Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is

ON/OFF*1

Suspend Beep

suspended.

Blind Spot

Audible and Visual

Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Alert*1/Visual Alert/

Information*

OFF

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Changes the setting for the automatic locking

With Vehicle

Auto Door Lock

Speed*1/Shift from

feature.

P/OFF

All Doors with

Driver’s Door

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

Opens*1/All Doors

automatically.

with Shift to P/All

Doors with IGN Off/

Vehicle

Door Setup

OFF

Key and Remote

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to

Driver Door*1/All

unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in

Unlock Mode

Doors

key.

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

ON*1/OFF

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

90 sec/60 sec/30

Security Relock Timer

and the security system to set after you unlock the

sec*1

vehicle without opening any door.

 

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 443

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Interior Light

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

60 sec/30 sec*1/15

Dimming Time

on after you close the doors.

sec

Headlight Auto Off

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60 sec/30 sec/15

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

sec*1/0 sec

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

Min/Low/Mid*1/

Lighting

Illumination

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in

High/Max

Setup

Sensitivity

the AUTO position.

Vehicle

Auto Headlight On

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when

the headlights automatically come on while the

ON*1/OFF

with Wiper On

headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

Auto Light

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/

Sensitivity*

Low/Min

Wireless

Turns the wireless charger feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Charger*

Maintenance

Oil Life

Resets the engine oil life display when you have

Information

performed the maintenance service.

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Default Camera View

Changes the camera view mode when the rear

Last Used/Normal

camera monitor is turned on.

View/Wide View*1

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 619

Rear Camera

Guidelines

Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear

Dynamic/Fixed/

camera monitor.

Both*1/OFF

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 619

Camera

Cross Traffic

Turns the cross traffic monitor on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Monitor*

Show with Turn

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on

when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a

ON*1/OFF

Signal

LaneWatch*

right turn.

Show Reference Line

Selects whether the reference lines come on the

ON*1/OFF

LaneWatch monitor.

Brightness

Adjusts the settings of the audio/information

Display

Contrast

screen.

 

2 Display Setup P. 293

Black Level

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 445

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bass / Treble

Center /

Subwoofer

Volume*

Subwoofer

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.

Volume*

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 292

Sound

Balance / Fader

Audio Zones*

Speed Volume

Compensation

DTS Neural

Surround*

Notifications

Changes the notification settings for apps.

* Not available on all models
Customized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Defaulting All the Settings

 

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Select .
Select Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select Factory Data Reset.

u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Continue to reset the settings.
Select Continue again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings

 

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.

HondaLink® P. 329

Features

447

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

 

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

 

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

NOTE:

Some LED lightbulbs installed in the garage door opener can interfere with the training and consistent operation of your HomeLink device. Please consider use of Low RF interference bulbs in your garage door opener.

Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

* Not available on all models
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Training HomeLink

 

Indicator

 

I HomeLink Button

HomeLink Button
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered

learned code:

Press and hold the I and III HomeLink buttons for about 10 seconds, until the orange indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

 

Features

Continued 449

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Programming a Button
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?

1Training HomeLink

 

Reprogramming a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash

Features

 

YES

 

3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

 

Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?

NO

 

3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener

 

A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)

change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on

green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

orange. This should take about 20 seconds.

2. Release the HomeLink button and position the

remote transmitter you wish to link 1 – 3 inches (3 –

8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to

program, then follow steps 3 – 6 under

“programming a button.”

Erasing Button Memory

To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all

YES NO

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
programming before selling the vehicle.

Operating

Training

 

Complete HomeLink LED is continuously on green.

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled device should operate.

Training Complete

 

HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.

 

5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

 

5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

 

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.

Questions

For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

450

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with color audio system

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

Microphone

(Phone) Button

Volume up

Volume down

(Talk) Button

Selector Knob

(Hang-up/Back) Button

(Pick-up) Button

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an incoming call.

 

(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.

(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

 

1Using HFL

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.

Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.

Speed Dial P. 466
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Features

 

Continued 451

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features

 

HFL Status Display

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength

Roaming Status

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected

to HFL.

HFL Mode

Caller’s Name

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

1Using HFL

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 466
452

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

1HFL Menus

 

or

 

Phone

Speed Dial*1

Add New

 

(Existing entry list)

Call History

 

Phonebook

 

Phone Number

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Features

 

Call History*1

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Received Calls

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Missed Calls

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Phonebook*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Dial*1

 

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 453

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

 

Features

 

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Connect a Phone

 

Connect an Audio Device

 

Disconnect All Devices

 

Delete Device

 

Pass-Key

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system.

Disconnect a paired device from the system.

Delete a previously paired device.

Change a pairing code.

454

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Add New

Speed Dial*1

Call History

Phonebook

Phone Number

Existing entry list

Change Speed Dial

 

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Change a previously stored speed dial number.

Features

 

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Store Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Delete Voice Tag

 

Continued 455

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

 

Ringtone

Fixed

 

Mobile Phone

 

Caller ID Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

 

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID.

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,

System Clear

and security codes.

456

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.

When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

 

u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is connected to HFL.
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

Features

 

Continued 457

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.

Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Add New Device, then press .
u The screen changes to device list.

Rotate to select Add New, then press
.

 

458

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.

 

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for

Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by a phone.

 

Features

 

Continued 459

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

 

Rotate to select a desired device name, then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

 

460

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press

.

 

Features

Input a new pairing code, then press .

Continued 461

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Delete Device, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

462

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press

.

 

4. Rotate to select Mobile Phone or Fixed, then press .

 

Caller ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press .
Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .

1Ring Tone

 

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

1Caller ID Information

Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook.

Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed.

Features

 

Continued 463

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To Clear the System
All speed dial entries, all imported phonebook data, all call history data, paired phones, pairing codes, caller ID settings, and volume settings are reset as default.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select System Clear, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

 

464

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

 

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile Other

Work

Voice

Pager

If a name has four or more numbers, … appears instead of category icons.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Continued 465

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select Add New, then press
.

Rotate to select a place to choose a

number from, then press .

 

From Call History:

u Select a number from the call history.

From Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

From Phone Number:

u Input the number manually.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.

1Speed Dial

 

When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands.

466

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To edit a speed dial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press .
Select a new speed dial number, then press

.

 

Features

Continued 467

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Change Speed Dial

 

Delete Speed Dial

Store Voice Tag

 

ChangeChange SpSpeedpeed DialDial

DeleteDelete SpeedSpeed DialDial

To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

To change a voice tag
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

468

 

Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag

To delete a voice tag
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

To delete a speed dial number
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 469

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

470

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press .
Rotate to select a name, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

To make a call using a phone number
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Dial, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 452
Speed Dial P. 466
1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 452
Speed Dial P. 466
Features

 

Continued 471

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using redial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .

3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using redial

 

Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

472

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a speed dial entry
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

 

When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 466
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

 

Features

Continued 473

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible

 

HFL Mode

notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the

call.

 

Caller’s Name

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

Rotate to select the icon, then press .

474

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

To view the available options, press the button.
Rotate to select the option, then press
.

u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

 

1Options During a Call

 

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

 

475

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

 

Models with Display Audio

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

(Back) Button Microphone

3 / 4/ / Buttons

ENTER Button

Volume up

Volume down

(Home) Button

(Talk) Button

(Hang-up) Button

(Pick-up) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities,

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON.

Phone Setup P. 481
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, select the audio system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
If there is no speed dial entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.

Favorite Contacts P. 486
If there is no call history, the call history is disabled.

476

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen of the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.

 

(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.

3/4/

/

buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen

 

of the driver information interface.

ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone screen of the driver information interface.

(Home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.

To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface:

Press the (home) button on the steering wheel.
Select Phone.
u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

 

Continued 477

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features

 

HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Bluetooth Indicator

Signal Strength

Appears when your phone is

Battery Level Status

connected to HFL.

HFL Mode

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number

 

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Favorite Contacts P. 486
1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

478

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone settings screen
1. Select .

 

2. Select Phone.

3. Select Settings.

 

Change Connected Phone + Connect New Device

 

(Existing entry list)

 

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Pair a new phone to the system.

Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.

Features

 

Auto Sync Phone

 

Auto Phone Call Transfer

 

Ringtone

 

HondaLink Assist

 

Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Select the ring tone.

Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.

Continued 479

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone menu screen
1. Select .

 

2. Select Phone.

 

Features

Recent Calls

 

All

 

Dialed

 

Missed

 

Received

 

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Display the last outgoing calls.

Display the last missed calls.

Display the last incoming calls.

Favorite Contacts

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Contacts

Enter a phone number to dial.

Keypad

 

480

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phone Setup
Bluetooth® setup

You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.

1. Select .

 

2. Select Settings.

Select Connections.
Select Bluetooth.
Select Options.
Select Bluetooth, then ON.

Features

Continued 481

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

Select .
Select Phone.
Select Connect Phone.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then select + Connect New Device.
u HFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth® device.

Select your phone when it appears on the list.
u If your phone still does not appear, search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone.

From your phone, search for HandsFree Link.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

Select desired functions and then select Connect.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue or Connect without Internet.

 

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system.
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone can be used with the internet tethering.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is unavailable and + Connect New Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth screen.

482

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 479

2. Select Change Connected Phone.

3. Select a phone to connect.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

4. Select , or .

5. Select Apply.

To delete a paired phone

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 479

Select Change Connected Phone.
Select a phone you want to delete.
1To change the currently paired phone

 

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.

Features

 

Select Delete Device.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete.
Continued 483

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 479

 

2. Select Ringtone.

3. Select Vehicle or Phone.

Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 479

 

2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.

Select ON or OFF.
1Ring Tone

 

Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.

Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

484

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 479

2. Select Auto Sync Phone.

Select ON or OFF.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Mobile Work

Home

Other

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Continued 485

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Favorite Contacts

Recent Calls Screen

Star Icon

Contacts Screen

Star Icon

Keypad Screen

Star Icon

To store a speed dial number:

Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 480

Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad screen.
Select the star icon.
u A notification appears on the screen if the speed dial is successfully stored.

u To remove the speed dial, select the star icon again.

486

To edit a speed dial

Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 480

Select Favorite Contacts.
Select Edit on the speed dial entry you want to edit.
Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial
Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 480

Select Favorite Contacts.
Select Edit on the speed dial entry you want to delete.
Select Remove Contact.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Continue.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 487

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Making a Call

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, or speed dial entries.

1Making a Call

 

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay.

488

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 480

Select Contacts.
Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a phone number
Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 480

Select Keypad.
Select a number.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.

Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 489

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received.
Go to the phone menu screen.

Phone menu screen P. 480
Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a speed dial entry
Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 480

Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of speed dial entries by selecting Reorder.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using the call history

 

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to the system.

490

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call… screen appears.

 

Press the button to answer the call.

 

Press the button to decline or end the call.

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower

Mute Icon

half of the screen.

 

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

1Options During a Call

Keypad: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

Features

 

Continued 491

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To Set Up Text Message Options
To turn on or off the text message

notice

1. Select .

 

2. Select Messages.

3. Select Settings.

Select Notifications.
Select ON or OFF.

1To Set Up Text Message Options

 

To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

1To turn on or off the text message notice

ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message.

OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

Features

492

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Text Message
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new

text message.

2. Select Open to display the message.

u The text message is displayed.

3. Select Play to listen to the message. To discontinue the message read-out, select

Stop.

1Receiving a Text Message

 

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

The system can only receive messages that are sent a text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 of the last text messages received.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

Features

 

Continued 493

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Selecting a Phone
You can select one from the Bluetooth® device list to be active and receive notifications.

Select .
Select Messages.

3. Select Settings.

4. Select Change Connected Phone.

5. Change a desired phone.

2 To change the currently paired phone

P. 483

1Selecting a Phone

 

You can only receive notifications from one phone at a time.

494

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Displaying Messages

Message List

1. Select

.

 

2. Select Messages.

1Displaying Messages

 

The (blue) icon appears next to an unread

message.

u Select a phone if necessary.

3. Select a message.

u The text message is displayed.

Text Message

If you delete a message on the phone, the message will also be deleted from the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select Prev or Next on the message screen.

 

Features

Continued 495

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Read or Stop reading a message
Go to the text message screen.
Select Play.
u The system starts reading the message aloud.

Select Pause to stop reading.
Select Play again to start reading the message.

Reply to a message

Go to the text message screen.
Select Reply.
Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Send to send the message.
u Message sent appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

 

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

Talk to you later, I’m driving.
I’m on my way.
I’m running late.
OK
Yes
No
You can add a reply message by selecting + Create New Message.

To edit a reply message P. 497
Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
496

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To edit a reply message
1. Select .

2. Select Messages.

3. Select Settings.

4. Select Edit System Replies.

5. Select the reply message you want to edit or + Create New Message.

u The on-screen keyboard screen is displayed.

6. Enter a reply message, and then select Save.

To delete a reply message

Select .
Select Messages.
Select Settings.
Select Delete System Replies.
Select on the reply message you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Delete.

1To edit a reply message

 

You can change the order of reply messages by selecting Reorder.

Features

 

Continued 497

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.

2. Select Call.

 

Features

498

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

 

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

1In Case of Emergency

 

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency service when:

You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage areas.
There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

Features

 

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator.

Continued 499

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To enable notification
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

 

2 Phone settings screen P. 479

2. Select HondaLink Assist.

3. Select ON or OFF.

 

1To enable notification

 

Setting options:

ON: Notification is available.
OFF: Disable the feature.
Features

500

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Manual operator connection*
ASSIST Button

 

If you need to talk to the HondaLink® operator in a situation where no airbag has deployed, you can manually connect to them by pressing the ASSIST button with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON.

Open the cover attached to the ceiling console.
Press the ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the HondaLink® operator.

1Manual operator connection*

 

Do not press the button while driving. When you need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a safe place.

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it automatically cancels the action after three minutes.

If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the ASSIST button.

 

Features

* Not available on all models 501

CabinTalkTM*

Your audio system allows you or the front passenger voices to be broadcast to the second and third row seat’s passengers using the rear speakers and/or headphones.

1CabinTalkTM *

 

You can also switch to the CabinTalk screen by

selecting CabinTalk on the front control panel for

Features

 

How to use

Models with center speaker

Select .
Select CabinTalk.
u Models with center speaker

Select Speakers to broadcast to the rear speakers.

u Select Headphones to broadcast to headphones.

u Select Mic is On to mute your voice.

 

the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system.

2 Front Control Panel Operation P. 387

Models with center speaker

When Speakers is selected, you can adjust the speaker volume by turning the volume knob.

Models without center speaker

* Not available on all models
Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving……………………………..

504

Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-

Braking

Towing a Trailer…………………………..

510

VTM4TM) AWD System*………………

554

Brake System ……………………………..

604

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines …..

520

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………..

606

When Driving

with Tire Fill Assist……………………..

555

Brake Assist System …………………….

607

Starting the Engine ……………………..

522

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –

Parking Your Vehicle

Automatic Transmission ……………….

529

Required Federal Explanation ………

557

When Stopped …………………………..

608

Shifting ……………………………………..

530

Honda Sensing®…………………………..

559

Parking Sensor System* ……………….

610

Auto Idle Stop…………………………….

538

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

Cross Traffic Monitor* …………………

615

ECON Mode ………………………………

543

(CMBSTM) …………………………………

562

Multi-View Rear Camera………………

619

Intelligent Traction Management*….

544

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)………

574

Refueling

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ..

587

Fuel Information …………………………

621

Stability Control (ESC), System…………..

546

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)

How to Refuel ……………………………

622

Agile Handling Assist …………………..

548

System …………………………………

596

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Blind spot information System* ……..

549

Front Sensor Camera …………………..

601

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing

LaneWatchTM*…………………………….

552

Radar Sensor………………………………

603

CO2 Emissions…………………………..

624

* Not available on all models 503

Before Driving

Driving

 

Driving Preparation

 

Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.

u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.

Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 656

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks

 

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

504

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

Maximum Load Limit P. 507
Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.

If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 149
Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Adjusting the Seats P. 194
Adjusting the Front and Second Row Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions P. 200
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 191
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 192
1Interior Checks

 

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

 

Continued 505

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 82

 

Driving

506

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit

 

Second row captain seat models

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,173 lbs (532 kg).

Second row bench seat models

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 1,340 lbs (608 kg).

All models

 

See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
1Maximum Load Limit

 

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.

Specifications P. 712
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

Specifications P. 712
Driving

 

Continued 507

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Driving

508

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

1,173 lbs

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

873 lbs

(532 kg)

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

(396 kg)

Example2

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

1,173 lbs

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

423 lbs

(532 kg)

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

(192 kg)

1Maximum Load Limit

 

Towing a Trailer:

See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a tailer.

Towing a Trailer P. 510
Driving

 

509

Towing a Trailer

Driving

 

Towing Preparation

Towing Load Limits

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

Total trailer weight

Do not exceed the maximum allowable

weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in

or on it shown in the table.

Towing loads in excess of this can seriously

affect vehicle handling and performance and

can damage the engine and drivetrain.

Total Load

Number of

AWD models with

AWD models

2WD models

occupants

ATF cooler

without ATF cooler

2

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)

3

4,750 lbs (2,155 kg)

3,250 lbs (1,474 kg)

3,250 lbs (1,474 kg)

4

4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)

3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)

3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)

5

4,250 lbs (1,928 kg)

2,750 lbs (1,247 kg)

2,750 lbs (1,247 kg)

6

4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)

2,500 lbs (1,134 kg)

2,500 lbs (1,134 kg)

7

2,500 lbs (1,134 kg)

2,250 lbs (1,021 kg)

2,250 lbs (1,021 kg)

8

Towing not recommended

Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions:

Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back.
Each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68 kg).
Each occupant has 17.6 lb (8 kg) cargo in the cargo area.
Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load.

1Towing Load Limits

 

WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution.

Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information.

Break-in Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.

Gross weight information

Vehicle Specifications P. 712
510

 

TonTongueue Load

Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded

trailer on the hitch should be approximately:

Boat trailers: 5 – 15% of the total trailer

weight

Other trailers: 10 – 15% of total trailer weight

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Number of

AWD models with or without

2WD models

occupants

ATF cooler

2

500 lbs (227 kg)

350 lbs (159 kg)

3

475 lbs (215 kg)

325 lbs (147 kg)

4

450 lbs (204 kg)

300 lbs (136 kg)

5

375 lbs (170 kg)

275 lbs (125 kg)

6

250 lbs (113 kg)

240 lbs (109 kg)

7

125 lbs (57 kg)

115 lbs (52 kg)

8

Towing not recommended

Driving

 

Continued 511

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving

 

How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale Check each weight in the order indicated as shown.
Refer to the table on the right for each weight’s limit except for the tongue load.

2 Tongue load P. 511

Front gross axle weight.
Gross combined weight.

2. Gross vehicle weight. 5. Hitched trailer weight.

Rear gross axle weight. 6. Unhitched trailer weight.
If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2.
The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet (305 meters) of elevation.
To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6.
Refer to the trailer owner’s manual for additional information.
1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale

 

Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who watches the scale is needed as all occupants should stay in the vehicle.

Weight limit for 2WD models

AWD models

Front gross axle

2,734 lbs

2,855 lbs

(1,240 kg)

(1,295 kg)

Gross vehicle

5,545 lbs

5,842 lbs

(2,515 kg)

(2,650 kg)

Rear gross axle

2,965 lbs

3,142 lbs

(1,345 kg)

(1,425 kg)

Gross combined

8,025 lbs

9,755 lbs

(3,640 kg)

(4,425 kg)

If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution.

512

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment.

To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Honda equipment whenever possible.

Trailer brakes
Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to install most electric trailer brake controllers.

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

 

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and setup of the equipment.

Improper installation and setup can affect the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

 

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only

Trailer brake controller connector’s terminals:

 

Electric Brake

+B (Light Green)

(Brown)

(20A)

Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer brake controller following the trailer brake controller manufacturer’s instructions. Failure to properly install the trailer brake controller may increase the distance it takes for you to stop your vehicle when towing a trailer.

be installed by a qualified technician.

Trailer packages and products:

Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc.
Wiring harness kit
Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included)
2 Trailer brakes P. 513

Automatic transmission cooler
Are available at a dealer.

Driving

Ground (Black) Stop (Violet)

1Trailer brakes

The 4-pin gray connector is located under the

instrument panel near the top of the parking brake

pedal.

Continued 513

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Electric Brake

 

(Brown)

The trailer hitch harness is used to install the

controller for the electric trailer brakes.

Ground

(Black)

+B (20A)

(Blue)

Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine

compartment sub fuse box.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B P. 702
Brake Lights

(Sky Blue)

 

Driving

514

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

 

Pins’ wiring color codes and their purposes:

1Trailer light

 

The trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.

Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the correct connector and pins.

+B Trailer Main

(Red)

Trailer Small Light (Red) Stop Light (Beige)

Right Turn Signal

(Green)

+B ELEC Brake

(Brown)

+B Trailer Charge

(Sky Blue)

Back Light

(Brown)

IG2 HAC

(Light Green)

 

Left Turn Signal

(Blue)

We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter.

They are designed for your vehicle.

Hitches
Read the trailer manufacturer’s instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for the height of the trailer you will be towing.

Weight distribution hitches
Your vehicle is designed to tow without the need for a load distributing hitch. If you wish to use one, please consult your trailer maker for proper installation and set-up. Improper set-up could degrade the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle.

Driving

Continued 515

Towing a TraileruTowing Preparation
Driving

 

Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

Sway control
This device can be used if your trailer tends to sway. Your trailer maker can tell you what kind of sway control you need and how to install it. Improper installation could degrade the handling and stability of your vehicle.

Trailer mirrors
Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Automatic transmission cooler

AWD models

An additional ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler is required to keep the transmission from overheating when towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg). You can get the additional ATF cooler at a dealer.

516

Towing a TraileruTrailer Stability Assist
Trailer Stability Assist

 

Helps to stabilize the vehicle and trailer when the trailer severely sways.

How trailer stability assist works
When the vehicle and trailer become unstable while driving, trailer stability assist determines the cause. If the trailer oscillation is detected as the cause, and the swaying increases, the system applies the brakes or controls engine output to reduce vehicle speed.

Both the vehicle and trailer brake lights come on automatically if you brake to reduce vehicle speed.

1Trailer Stability Assist

 

Trailer stability assist is not a function that prevents the vehicle and trailer from swaying. Avoid high speeds, abrupt steering, improper trailer load, and sudden braking to keep the trailer from swaying. When swayed too severely, the system becomes ineffective, and you may lose control of your vehicle, causing the trailer to roll over or get damaged.

Driving Safely with a Trailer P. 518
Trailer towing sway is caused by:

Crosswinds
Improper towbar down load
Excessive Speed

The VSA® system indicator blinks during the trailer stability assist operation.

VSA® Operation P. 546
Driving

517

Towing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Driving

 

Driving Safely with a Trailer

Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 510

When towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590 kg), use of gasoline with a pump octane number of 87 or higher is recommended.
u Towing performance can be affected by high altitude, high temperature, or steep uphill.

Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while driving.
Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
Check the pressures of the trailer tires.
Turn off the Auto Idle Stop system using the Auto Idle Stop OFF button. The trailer weight can affect your vehicle’s brake effectiveness if Auto Idle Stop is activated on a hill while towing a trailer.
Towing Speeds and Gears
Drive slower than normal.
Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Turning and Braking
Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
Allow more time and distance for braking.
Do not brake or turn suddenly.
1Driving Safely with a Trailer

 

Operating speed when towing a trailer must not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).

Parking

In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.

1Towing Speeds and Gears

When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).

At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling.

518

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

 

Driving in Hilly Terrain
Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the white (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
Change the gear position to S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Retrieving a Boat
When retrieving aboatfromthewater,werecommendusingthesequentialshift mode Stoutilizethetransmissionslowergears.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle isnotdesignedtobetowedbehindamotorhome.Ifyourvehicleneeds to betowedinanemergency,refertotheemergencytowinginformation.

Emergency Towing P. 706
1Driving in Hilly Terrain

 

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature exceeds the specified limit, the transmission will also automatically up shift, even in the sequential shift mode.

Driving

519

 

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving

 

General Information

 

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.

If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions

 

To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations:

Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 507

Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

 

WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual.
Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

Important Handling Information P. 36
Precautions While Driving P. 528
Spinning the tires excessively can also damage the Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4TM) system.

520

uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble

Avoiding Trouble

 

Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.
Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.
Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
Crossing a Stream – Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front tow hook is provided for this purpose.
Driving

 

521

When Driving

Driving

 

Starting the Engine

 

Make sure the parking brake is applied.

Depress the brake pedal.

Brake Pedal

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine

 

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 690
The engine may not start if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

522

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Put the transmission into P.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1Starting the Engine

 

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft.

If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

Immobilizer System P. 163

Driving

Continued 523

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

Remote Engine Start*
You can remotely start the engine on using the keyless remote.

To start the engine

Press the

button, then press and

hold the

button

Go within the range,

lights flash once.

and try again.

Some exterior

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

Some exterior lights flash Exterior lights will not

six times if the engine flash if the engine does

starts successfully. not start.

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously.

To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button.

 

u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully.

1Remote Engine Start*

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if:

You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the driver information interface.
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

To stop the engine

Go within the range,

and try again.

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the keyless access system range.

The engine will not stop.

Press and hold the

button for

The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops

one

second.

successfully.

1Remote Engine Start*

 

The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is unlocked.
You have already used the remote twice to start the engine.
Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
There is any antenna failure.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The telematics* unit malfunctions.
The security system alarm is not set.
The engine may stop while it is running if:

You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of starting the engine with the keyless remote.
The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote.
There is any antenna failure.
The security system alarm is not set.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is unlocked.
Any door is open.
The telematics* unit malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The battery is low.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 525

When DrivinguStarting the Engine

Driving

1Remote Engine Start*

 

The engine oil pressure is low.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems.
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will

automatically precondition inside the vehicle.

When it is warm outside:

The climate control system is activated in recirculation mode.
The seat ventilation is activated*.
When it is cold outside:

The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature.
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are activated.
The seat heaters* and heated steering wheel* are activated.
2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 228

2 Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators* P. 226,

227

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Starting to Drive

When the engine was started using the keyless remote*

Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button simultaneously.
When the engine was started in any case

Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 604

Put the transmission into D. Select R when reversing.
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Put the transmission into D or S when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Starting to Drive

 

When the engine was started using the keyless remote*

The engine stops when the transmission position is changed from (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models 527

When DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving

 

Precautions While Driving

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory).

In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine, driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving

 

NOTICE

Do not change the gear position while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not change the gear position to (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

528

When DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission

Creeping

The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle

 

Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.

Important Handling Information P. 36
Precautions While Driving P. 528

Driving

529

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shifting

 

Change the gear position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift button positions

Park

Used when parking or starting the engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Used when idling

Drive/S Position

Each time you press the D/S button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode. Used for:

Drive

Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 9th automatically)
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
Position
Automatically changing gears between 1st and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed)
Driving in the sequential mode
1Shifting

 

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the gear position Indicator.

To prevent malfunction and unintended engagement:

Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons.
Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift buttons.
Do not let passengers or children operate the shift buttons.
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when you depress the accelerator pedal with the gear position in (N.

Change the gear position to (D or (R with the brake pedal depressed.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 97
530

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

P (parking) button

(P Button

Park your vehicle in a safe place with the power mode in ON, then apply the brakes and press the P button to put the transmission in Park.

The indicators on the sides of the P button come on.

1Shifting

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (−22°F/−30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.

 

Driving

Continued 531

When DrivinguShifting
Shift Operation

M (sequential mode)

Indicator

Tachometer’s Red Zone

1Shift Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change (D to (R and vice versa, depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop, then select the intended gear position while maintaining brake pressure.

Driving

 

Shift Button

Indicator

Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator

Gear Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)

Press the (P button.

Pull back the (R button.

Press the (N button.

Press the D/S button.

Each time you press the button, the mode switches between Drive and S Position mode.

Use the gear position indicator and the shift button indicator to check the gear position before selecting a shift button.

If the indicator of the currently selected gear position, or all the gear position indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

When the engine speed is increased while the transmission is in (N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may be cut off even without the engine speed entering the tachometer’s red zone.

From the audio/information screen, you can choose to have the system activate a beeper when you change to (R.

Customized Features P. 429
532

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

In freezing or sub-freezing conditions, the electronic gear selector response may be slow.

Always depress the brake pedal before changing the gear position to P, and confirm that P is shown on the gear position indicator before releasing the brake.

When opening the driver’s door
If you open the driver’s door under the following conditions, the gear position automatically changes to P.

The vehicle is stationary with the engine running, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or slower.
The transmission is in other than P.
You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually change the gear position from P with the brake pedal depressed, the gear position will automatically return to P once you release the brake pedal.

When turning off the power mode
If you turn the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in other than P, the gear position automatically changes to P.

1When opening the driver’s door

 

You should always select (P before opening the driver’s door.

Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.

When Stopped P. 608
If you want to drive the vehicle after the gear position has automatically changed to (P under the described conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt, depress the brake pedal, then change the gear position.

If you leave the vehicle, turn off the engine and lock the doors.

Driving

 

Continued 533

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

If you want to keep the transmission in N position [car wash mode] With the engine running:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Select N, then release the button to display (Neutral) N hold mode on the driver information interface.

3. Press and hold N again for two seconds.

u This puts the vehicle in car wash mode which must be used when your vehicle is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an attendant do not remain in the vehicle.

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed after car wash mode has been activated, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a message will be displayed on the driver information interface.

 

u For 15 minutes the gear position remains in N with the power mode in ACCESSORY. After that, the position automatically changes to P and the power mode changes to OFF.

u Manually changing to P cancels ACCESSORY mode. The P indicator comes on and the power mode changes to OFF. You must always shift to P when car wash mode is no longer needed.

1If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode]

 

To keep the vehicle (N position, you can also follow this procedure:

While the power mode is on, select (N, and then within five seconds, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Note that the transmission may not stay in (N position while any of the following indicators is on:

Transmission system indicator.
Malfunction indicator lamp.
Charging system indicator.
534

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Restrictions on selecting a gear position
You cannot select a gear position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.

When the

1. Under these circumstances:

2. If you try to change to

3. The gear position

How to change the

transmission is in:

the following:

remains in/changes to: gear position

The brake pedal is not depressed.

(P

The accelerator pedal is

(P

depressed.

The vehicle is moving at low

Release the accelerator

Other gear position

pedal and depress the

speed without the brake pedal

brake pedal.

depressed.

(N

The vehicle is moving at low

speed with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

(N

(N, (D or (S

The vehicle is moving forward.

(R

Stop your vehicle in a

(R or (N

The vehicle is moving backward.

(D, (S

safe place, keep the

brake pedal pressed,

and select the

(R, (N, (D or (S

The vehicle is moving.

(P

appropriate gear

position.

Driving

 

Continued 535

When DrivinguShifting
Sequential Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 9th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential mode.

When the transmission is in D:
The vehicle will go into the sequential mode momentarily, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on.

Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential mode will automatically switch off, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will go off.

Hold the + paddle shifter for two seconds or push drive.

■ When the transmission is in S

 

D/S

button to return to normal

Driving

The vehicle will go into the sequential mode, and the M (sequential mode) indicator and sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to the next gear.

You can cancel this mode by holding the + paddle shifter for two seconds or push D/S button. When the sequential mode is canceled, the sequential mode indicator and sequential mode gear selection indicator go off.

536

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Sequential Mode Operation

Paddle Shifter

Paddle Shifter

(Shift down)

(Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling

Upshifting when pulling

the

paddle shifter.

the

paddle shifter.

(Changes to a lower gear)

(Changes to a higher gear)

1Sequential Mode Operation

 

Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change.

To change gears continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

If the sequential mode gear selection indicator blinks when you try to shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear range or the protection of transmission system is necessary. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Sequential

Mode Gear

Selection

Indicator

Driving

 

537

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving

 

Auto Idle Stop

 

To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.

The engine then restarts once the vehicle is

 

about to move again, and the indicator (green) goes off.

The Engine Automatically Restarts When P. 541
The environmental and vehicle conditions that

Auto Idle Stop

impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are

Indicator (Green)

varied.

Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 539, 540
A message associated with Auto Idle Stop

appears on the driver information interface.

Indicators P. 82
Customized Features P. 429
If the driver’s door is opened while the

indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds

to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function

is in operation.

1Auto Idle Stop

 

The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details.

The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:

Increases in the ECON mode, compared to when the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.
2 ECON Mode P. 543

538

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

 

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)

 

To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops. u Auto Idle Stop system will stop and the

indicator (Amber) will come on.

The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.

Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
The vehicle stops with the gear position in D and the brake pedal depressed. When you put the transmission into P, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released.

u If you depress the brake pedal, the engine may automatically restart.

Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
The engine is adequately not warmed up or coolant temperature is high.
The transmission fluid temperature is low or high.
The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h) after the engine starts.
The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline.
A gear position other than D.
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:

Do not open a hood, during idling stop. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically.

In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Starting the Engine P. 522
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restart automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.

Starting the Engine P. 522
Driving

 

Continued 539

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Driving

 

The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate Auto Idle Stop.

The battery charge is low.
The internal temperature of the battery is 14°F (−10°C) or less.
The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F (−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
is ON (indicator on).
The rear fan is set to maximum speed.
u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system is in use.

When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud*, or Sand*.
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly.

• The steering wheel is operated.

• The fan speed is high.

• Altitude is high.

• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.

• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.

• The rear fan is set to maximum speed.

u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system is in use.

* Not available on all models
When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
The Engine Automatically Restarts When
The brake pedal is released.

The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed when:
The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
When a steering wheel is operated.
The transmission is put into R or S, or when it is set from N to D.
u If you put the transmission into P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you depress the brake pedal.

The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.
The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during a stop.
The battery charge becomes low.
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.
is ON (indicator on).
The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.
The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.
The rear fan is set to maximum speed.
u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate control system is in use.

When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud*, or Sand*.
1The Engine Automatically Restarts When

 

If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 541

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Starting Assist Brake Function
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine.

This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.

 

Driving

542

When DrivinguECON Mode
ECON Mode

 

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

 

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, air conditioning system, and cruise control.

1ECON Mode

 

While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations.

 

Driving

543

When DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management*
Intelligent Traction Management*

 

The Intelligent Traction Management optimizes vehicle performance to help you drive on various surfaces. The system has available modes to select from: Normal, Snow, Mud*, and Sand*.

Press the mode button to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select appears on the driver information interface. When the vehicle is turned off and restarted, Intelligent Traction Management mode will revert to Normal.

 

1Intelligent Traction Management*

 

Refer to the Off-Highway Driving section for driving tips and safety precautions.

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 520
Driving

 

AWD models

Mode Button

Normal

Provides balanced

driving performance

on most road surfaces.

Snow

Use when driving on

snowy road surfaces.

Mud

Use when driving on

muddy road or off-

road surfaces.

Sand

Use when driving on

soft, sandy road or

off-road surfaces.

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguIntelligent Traction Management*

 

2WD models

Normal

Provides balanced

driving performance

on most road surfaces.

Snow

Use when driving on

snowy road surfaces.

 

Snow Button

Driving

545

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving

 

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

 

VSA® System

Indicator

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

546

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® On and Off

VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

The traction control stops fully functioning, allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come on and a message on the driver information interface informs you that the mode is changed.

AWD models

 

Traction control mode cannot be changed during Mud or Sand modes. If you are driving on mud or sand, Mud or Sand Intelligent Traction Management modes can also be used to free a stuck vehicle. On other road surfaces, change to Normal or Snow mode, then press and hold the (VSA® OFF) button.

 

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.

 

VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

With the button pressed, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA® traction and stability enhancement becomes less effective.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

Driving

 

547

When DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Agile Handling Assist

 

Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.

 

Driving

1Agile Handling Assist

 

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

548

When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
Blind spot information System*

 

Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots”.

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes.

How the system works
1Blind spot information System *

 

WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.

The transmission is in (D.
Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h)
Alert zone range

Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors:

 

underneath the

rear bumper A

corners B

Alert Zone

C

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, blind spot information system has limitations. Overreliance on blind spot information system may result in a collision.

The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur.

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not Available driver information interface appearing.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 549

When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
Driving

 

When the system detects a vehicle
Blind spot information System Alert Indicator:

Comes On

Located near the pillar on both sides.

Comes on when:

• A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind

to overtake you with a speed difference of

Blinks

no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your

vehicle.

• You pass a vehicle with a speed difference

of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

 

Blinks and a beeper sounds when:

You move the turn signal lever in the direction

of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds

three times.

1Blind spot information System *

 

The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions:

A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more than two seconds.
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The system does not operate when in (R.

You can turn off the audible alert, or all the blind spot information system alert using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 429
Turn the system off when towing a trailer.

The system may not work properly for the following reasons:

The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the radar coverage.
The trailer itself can be detected by the radar sensors, causing the blind spot information system alert indicators to come on.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguBlind spot information System*
1Blind spot information System *

Blind spot information system may be adversely affected when:

Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.
An object that does not reflect radio waves well, such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
Driving on a curved road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
The system picks up external electrical interference.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).

For a proper blind spot information system operation:

Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models 551

When DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
LaneWatchTM*

 

LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.

 

1LaneWatchTM*

 

WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

The system activates when you:

Move the turn signal Press the LaneWatch

lever to the passenger button.

side.

 

The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

Important Safety Reminder

Driving

The system deactivates when you:

Pull the turn signal Press the LaneWatch

lever back. button again.

Audio/Information Screen

Camera

Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions:

Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered, changing the height of the vehicle.
Your tires are over or under inflated.
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.

Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when you operate the turn signal lever.
Show Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch monitor.
Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 429

Reference Lines
1LaneWatchTM*

 

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen slightly look different from what they are.

LaneWatch display does not come on when the gear position is in (R.

For proper LaneWatch operation:

• The camera is located in the passenger side door

mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera

lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,

moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers

of any kind.

• Do not touch the camera lens.

 

1Reference Lines

3

2

1

 

Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 is farther away.

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if:

• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is

severely impacted, resulting in changing the

camera angle.

• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

Driving

* Not available on all models

553

When DrivinguIntelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System*
Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System*

 

The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4TM) AWD system is a full time all wheel drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amount of engine torque to all wheels independently according to the driving conditions.

You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.

Avoid continuously driving on slippery surfaces where a wheel is likely to spin out, and do not drive if the AWD indicator starts blinking. Driving continuously under such conditions can damage the system’s torque distribution unit.

If the AWD indicator blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to park, an idle the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

 

Driving

1Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System*

 

NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.

The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4TM) AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 662
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist

 

Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes significantly low, the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

 

Low Tire Pressure/

TPMS Indicator

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist

 

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 700
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather.
Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer
weather.

The Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.

The TPMS audibly and visually informs you of changes in tire pressure of the individual tire that you are adjusting using audible and visual indications.

If a change in tire pressure has been significant, the system beeps and the hazard lights flash continuously for five seconds when the specified tire pressure is reached. Stop filling the tire.

Driving

 

Continued 555

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
Driving

 

Tire Pressure Monitor
To select the tire pressure monitor, please follow

 

the following steps using the buttons on the

steering wheel.

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the (home) button.
Press the 3 / 4 button repeatedly until Maintenance appears.
Press the ENTER button and select Tire Pressure by pressing the 3 / 4 button.
Press the ENTER button and the tire pressure appears on the driver information interface.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in psi.

Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire

 

has significantly low pressure. The specific tire

is displayed on the screen.

1Tire Pressure Monitor

 

The pressure displayed on the driver information interface can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the driver information interface do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer.

Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the TPMS.

556

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation

 

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

 

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Driving

 

Continued 557

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation
Driving

 

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

558

Honda Sensing®

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Honda Sensing® has following functions.

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBS)TM 2 P. 562

• Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 596

The functions which require switch operations to activate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 2 P. 574
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 587

 

Driving

Continued 559

Honda Sensing®u
Operation Switches for the ACC/LKAS
Driving

 

CANCEL

Interval

Button

Button

 

MAIN button LKAS Button

RES/+ Button

−/SET Button

MAIN Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC and

LKAS. Or press to cancel these systems.

LKAS Button
Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.

RES/+/−/SET Button
Press RES/+ to resume the ACC or increase

the vehicle speed.

Press −/SET to set the ACC or decrease the

vehicle speed.

Interval Button
Press the (interval) button to change the

 

ACC following-interval.

CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC.
560

Multi-Information Display Content

You can see the current state of ACC and

LKAS.

aIndicates that ACC and LKAS are ready to

be activated.

bIndicates that LKAS is activated and

whether or not traffic lane lines are

detected.

 

cIndicates whether or not a vehicle is

detected ahead.

dShows the set vehicle speed.

eShows the set vehicle interval.

Honda Sensing®u

Driving

561

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

How the system works

When to use

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is behind the emblem.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle in front of you.

The CMBSTM activates when:

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Important Safety Reminder

The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 566
For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

Radar Sensor P. 603
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 601
1How the system works

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you.

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

562

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
When the system activates

The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts

1When the system activates

 

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians.

However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions.

Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 566

Beep

Audible Alert

Tactile Alert

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system’s earliest collision alert will come on through the driver information interface or the audio/information screen setting options.

2 Customized Features P. 125, 429

Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts.

u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the steering wheel, etc.).

1Vibration alert on the steering wheel

Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 97
Driving

Continued 563

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

CMBSTM

Distance between vehicles

The sensors detect a

Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel

Braking

vehicle

When in Long, visual and

In case of an

Normal

Vehicle

audible alerts come on at a

There is a risk of a collision

oncoming vehicle

Stage

Long Short

Ahead

longer distance from a vehicle

with the vehicle ahead of

detected, rapid

one

ahead than in Normal setting,

you.

vibration is

and in Short, at a shorter

Your Vehicle

provided.

distance than in Normal.

The risk of a collision has

Stage

Your

Vehicle

Lightly

Vehicle

Ahead

increased, time to respond

two

applied

is reduced.

The CMBSTM determines

Visual and audible alerts.

Stage

Your

Vehicle

Forcefully

Vehicle

Ahead

that a collision is

three

applied

unavoidable.

 

564

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
CMBSTM On and Off
Press and hold the button until the beeper

 

sounds to switch the system on or off.

When the CMBSTM is off:

• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument panel comes on.

• A message on the driver information interface reminds you that the system is off.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 566

Driving

Continued 565

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
566

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor behind the emblem gets dirty.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.

Driving

Continued 567

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Detection limitations
A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
568

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

 

When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or they are running.
When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

Driving

Continued 569

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Automatic shutoff
CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when:

The temperature inside the system is high.
You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

 

Driving

570

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

 

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

 

Driving

Continued 571

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

 

Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

572

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

 

Driving

573

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving

 

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

 

When to use

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is behind the emblem.

Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h)
Gear positions for adaptive cruise control: In (D or (S
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash. Use ACC only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.

WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability.

When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle’s brakes.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.

ACC cannot be activated if Intelligent Traction Management setting is snow, sand* or mud*.

* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

How to activate the system

How to use

ACC is on in the driver information interface.

Adaptive cruise control is ready to use.

■ Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

 

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the

brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a

safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 601
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM).

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 562

Driving

Continued 575

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving

 

To Set the Vehicle Speed

–/SET Button

On when

adaptive cruise

control begins

Press and release

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins.

When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon,

Set Vehicle

Set Vehicle

distance bars and set speed appear on the

Speed

Interval

driver information interface.

 

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

 

ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 579
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or off.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface between mph and km/h.

Units P. 120
Do not use ACC under the following conditions:

On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
576

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-interval P. 582

1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface.

 

ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate

interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Driving

Continued 577

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

 

A vehicle icon appears on

the driver information

interface.

There is no vehicle ahead
1When in Operation

 

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC

Driving

 

vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface.

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.

Customized Features P. 125, 429
Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 579
When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alerts even if a vehicle is in ACC range.

ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed.

578

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ACC Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 601

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

Vehicle conditions
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The camera temperature gets too high.
The parking brake is applied.
When the front grille is dirty.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.
1ACC Conditions and Limitations

 

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

Driving

 

Continued 579

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Detection limitations
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.

Driving

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
580

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

When driving through a narrow metal bridge.

When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.

Sensor detects upper section of

an empty carrier truck.

Panel truck,

tanker truck,

 

etc.

Driving

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Continued 581

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Driving

 

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To Set or Change Following-interval

Press the

(Interval) button to change the

Interval Button

ACC following-interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through short,

middle, long, and extra long following-

interval.

 

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface between mph and km/h.

Units P. 120
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.

582

Determine the most appropriate following-interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.

The higher vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

 

Following-interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

83 feet

100 feet

Short

25 meters

31 meters

1.1 sec

1.1 sec

110 feet

137 feet

Middle

33 meters

42 meters

1.5 sec

1.5 sec

154 feet

200 feet

Long

47 meters

61 meters

2.1 sec

2.1 sec

204 feet

265 feet

Extra

62 meters

81 meters

Long

2.8 sec

2.8 sec

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

 

Driving

Continued 583

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
To Cancel

CANCEL

Button

MAIN

Button

Automatic cancellation
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button. u ACC indicator goes off.
Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward.
1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

1Automatic cancellation

Driving

 

The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
When the radar sensor behind the emblem gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA®, or CMBSTM is activated.
When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button.

584

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

 

ACC ON

Cruise

Control ON

 

When to use
Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second.

 

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.

Driving

 

Continued 585

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button.
Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

 

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.

Driving

586

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

■ Tactile and visual alerts

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Steering input assist

The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

■ Front sensor camera Monitors the lane lines

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.

If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Important Safety Reminders

The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 97
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 593
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 601
Driving

 

Continued 587

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

 

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as warning display.

 

Warning Area

Warning Area

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

588

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.

The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
The vehicle is travelling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

How to activate the system
MAIN Button

 

LKAS Button

Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information

interface.

The system is ready to use.

Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver

information interface.

The system is activated.

Driving

 

Continued 589

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.
u The Lane outlines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

 

To Cancel

1To Cancel

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.

MAIN Button

LKAS Button

Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the

engine, even if you turned it on the last time

you drove the vehicle.

 

590

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to Lane outlines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

 

The system operation is suspended if
you:

Set the wipers to continuous operation. u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.

Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the

brake pedal.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate intermittently.

Driving

 

Continued 591

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is quickly turned.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• Driving through a sharp curve.

• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).

Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.

• The ABS or VSA® system engages.

The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

592

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.

Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.

Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.

Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

Driving

Continued 593

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

Driving

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
594

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Driving on roads with double lines.

Lane void of lines at exit or

interchange

Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.
Driving

 

595

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving

 

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.

 

Customized Features P. 429
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface.

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking.

u Braking is applied only when the lane

markings are solid continuous lines.

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid

crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations.

Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 601
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 599
There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

596

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
How the System Activates
The system activates when all the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking, or steering.
1How the System Activates

 

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on.

Indicators P. 82
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:

Not driven within a traffic lane.
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane.
Driven in a narrow lane.

Driving

Continued 597

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
RDM On and Off

RDM Button

Indicator

 

Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off.

u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the driver information interface when the system is on.

1RDM On and Off

 

When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the driver information interface or audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.

Customization flow P. 126
Customized Features P. 429
Driving

598

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.

Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.

Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.

Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

Driving

Continued 599

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving

 

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is towing a trailer.
600

Honda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
Front Sensor Camera

 

The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera

 

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.

Front Sensor Camera

 

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Driving

 

Continued 601

Honda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera

Driving

1Front Sensor Camera

 

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Camera Temperature Too High

message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Clean Front Windshield message

appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
602

uuHonda Sensing®uRadar Sensor

Radar Sensor

 

Radar Sensor

 

The radar sensor is located behind the emblem.

1Radar Sensor

 

Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

CMBSTM On and Off P. 565
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision
Your vehicle drives through deep water or is submerged in deep water
Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock, or embankment that could jar the radar sensor
Driving

 

603

Braking

Driving

 

Brake System

Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.

To apply:

 

Depress the parking brake pedal down with

your foot.

To release:

 

Depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake.
1Parking Brake

 

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.

If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the driver information interface.

Always apply the parking brake when parking.

604

BrakinguBrake System
Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Brake Assist System P. 607
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 606
1Foot Brake

 

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Driving

 

605

BrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving

 

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.”

ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:

Wet or snow covered roads.
Roads paved with stone.
Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

 

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:

You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
The tires are equipped with snow chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:

Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

606

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

 

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

 

Driving

607

Parking Your Vehicle

Driving

 

When Stopped

 

Depress the brake pedal firmly.
Apply the parking brake.
Change the gear position to P.
Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

 

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the gear position Indicator.

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:

Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Changing into (P before the vehicle stops completely.
608

Parking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
1When Stopped

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

 

Driving

609

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Driving

 

Parking Sensor System*

 

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles near your vehicle, and the beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

■ The sensor location and range

 

Front Corner Sensors

Rear Center Sensors

Rear Corner Sensors

Within about 26 in (65 cm) or less Within about 45 in (115 cm) or less

1Parking Sensor System*

 

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when:

The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or dirt.
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass, bumps, or a hill.
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
The system is affected by devices that emit ultrasonic waves.
Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:

Thin or low objects.
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton, or sponge.
Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the

 

parking sensor system button to turn on or off

the system. The indicator in the button comes

on when the system is on.

The front corner, rear center and rear corner

sensors start to detect an obstacle when the

transmission is in R, and the vehicle speed is

less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner sensors start to detect an

obstacle when the transmission is not in P,

and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8

 

km/h).

Driving

Continued 611

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Screen Operation
Split View Off You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab.

 

1Screen Operation

 

The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions:

If the parking sensor system is turned off.
If there is a malfunction in the system.
Driving

 

Split Screen

Tab

Split View On

612

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles becomes shorter

Length of the

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

Indicator

Audio/information screen

intermittent beep

Corner Sensors

Rear Center Sensors

Moderate

About 45-30 in

(115-75 cm)

Blinks in Yellow*1

About 30-26 in

Short

(75-65 cm)

Very short

About 26-14 in

About 26-14 in

Blinks in Amber

(65-35 cm)

(65-35 cm)

Indicators light where the

Continuous

About 14 in

About 14 in

Blinks in Red

sensor detects an obstacle

(35 cm) or less

(35 cm) or less

 

*1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

Driving

Continued 613

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Turning off All Rear Sensors
Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator in the button flashes.
Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.

 

1Turning off All Rear Sensors

 

When you set the gear position to (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.

Driving

614

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

 

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 615

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Radar sensors:

 

Underneath the rear bumper

corners

 

The system activates when:

The power mode is in ON.
The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 618
The transmission is in R.
Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or lower.
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions:

• An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,

near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the

radar sensor’s scope.

• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph

(5 km/h) or higher.

• A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than

between about 6 and 16 mph (10 and 25 km/h).

• The system picks up external interference such as

other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong

radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with

snow, ice, mud or dirt.

Driving

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.

The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

• When there is bad weather.

• Your vehicle is on an incline.

• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.

• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a

vehicle, and so on.

The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have a vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.

Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

When the System Detects a Vehicle

Arrow Icon

Normal View Wide View Top Down View

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen.

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

 

If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.

If the comes on when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.

 

Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

Continued 617

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen.

 

Select .
Select Settings.
Select Camera.
Select Rear Camera.
Select Cross Traffic Monitor.
Select ON or OFF.

Driving Icon

 

The system can also be turned on and off on

the audio/information screen by pressing the

CTM icon.

618

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the gear position is changed to R.

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Wide View Mode

Approx. 39

Normal View Mode

inches (1 m)

Approx. 20

inches (50 cm)

Tailgate Open

Bumper

Range

Guidelines

Top Down View Mode

Camera

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

Models with color audio system

You can change the Camera Guideline On or Off settings.

Customized Features P. 422
Models with Display Audio

You can change the Fixed, Dynamic, Both and OFF settings.

Customized Features P. 429
Driving

 

Continued 619

Multi-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Driving

 

You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the selector knob to switch the angle.

Models with Display Audio

 

Select the appropriate icon to switch the angle.

: Wide view mode

: Normal view mode

: Top down view mode

If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power system, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

Fixed: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R.

Dynamic: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction.

Both: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R and Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not appear.

Models with Display Audio

You can change the Last Used, Normal View and Wide View settings.

Customized Features P. 429
620

Refueling

Fuel Information

Fuel recommendation

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
1Fuel Information

 

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Driving

 

621

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving

 

How to Refuel

 

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

Press

rear.

Turn off the engine.
3. Press the fuel fill door release button.

u The fuel fill door opens.

1How to Refuel

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

622

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level.

u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically.

u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a minimum of 3.5 US gal (13.3 L) of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

 

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 708

Driving

623

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Driving

 

Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface.

Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 638

Maintain the specified tire pressure.
Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance.
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven

Gallons of

Miles per

fuel

Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test.

For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel consumption testing” in the search field at the top of the page.

624

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Engine Coolant …………………………..

643

Tire Service Life…………………………..

661

Inspection and Maintenance …………

626

Transmission Fluid……………………….

645

Tire and Wheel Replacement ………..

662

Safety When Performing Maintenance..627

Brake Fluid…………………………………

646

Tire Rotation………………………………

663

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid………

646

Winter Tires ……………………………….

664

Service …………………………………….

628

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………..

647

Battery………………………………………..

665

Maintenance MinderTM …………………

629

Checking and Maintaining Wiper

Remote Transmitter Care……………..

667

Maintenance Under the Hood

Blades ……………………………………

652

Remote Control and Wireless

Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 635

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Headphone Care* ………………………

668

Opening the Hood ………………………

636

Checking Tires ……………………………

656

Climate Control System Maintenance

670

Engine Compartment Cover………….

637

Tire and Loading Information Label ..

657

Cleaning

Recommended Engine Oil …………….

638

Tire Labeling ………………………………

657

Interior Care ………………………………

672

Oil Check …………………………………..

639

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)..

659

Exterior Care………………………………

674

Adding Engine Oil……………………….

640

Wear Indicators…………………………..

661

Accessories and Modifications ……..

677

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ….

641

* Not available on all models 625

Before Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Inspection and Maintenance

 

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Routine inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 27

Periodic inspections
Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 646

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 656

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 647
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 652
1Inspection and Maintenance

 

U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 632
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

Authorized Manuals P. 722
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

626

Before Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.

Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.

u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

 

627

Before Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

 

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

Maintenance

628

Maintenance MinderTM

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

 

Maintenance

629

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
To Use Maintenance MinderTM

 

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.

You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the ENTER button repeatedly until home screen appears.
Select Maintenance by pressing the 3 / 4 button repeatedly and press
ENTER.

Select Oil Life by pressing the 3 / 4 button and press ENTER.
The engine oil life appears on the screen.

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

 

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

Life (%)

100

100 to 91

90

90 to 81

80

80 to 71

70

70 to 61

60

60 to 51

50

50 to 41

Maintenance

 

Models with Display

Audio

3

Button

ENTER Button

Button

4

(Back)

(Home)

Button

Button

Home Screen

40

40 to 31

30

30 to 21

20

20 to 16

15

15 to 11

10

10 to 6

5

5 to 1

0

0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 632
Models with color audio system

ENTER Button

(Hang-up/ Back) Button

3 Button

4 Button

(Home)

Button

Engine Oil Life

630

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

Maintenance Due Soon

15%

The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6

The engine oil is approaching the end

percent. Once you switch the display

of its service life, and the maintenance

by pressing the

*1/

*2, or

items should be inspected and

button, this message will go off.

serviced soon.

Maintenance Due Now

5%

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1

The engine oil has almost reached the

percent. Press the

*1/

*2,

end of its service life, and the

or

button to switch to another

maintenance items should be

display.

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

Maintenance Past Due

Negative Distance

The remaining engine oil life has

The engine oil life has passed.

passed its service life, and a negative

The maintenance items must be

distance appears after driving over 10

inspected and serviced immediately.

miles (U.S. models) or 10 km

(Canadian models). Press the

*1/

*2, or

button to

switch to another display.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

 

Maintenance

 

Continued 631

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Service Items

System Message

Indicator Maintenance Minder Message

1Maintenance Service Items

 

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Main Item

Sub Items

U.S. models

 

Maintenance

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 719. *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada).

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid*

● Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4
Inspect valve clearance
● Replace engine coolant

● Replace rear differential fluid*, *5
● Replace brake fluid*6

*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3

if they are noisy.

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
*1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 43ºC, 110ºF), in very low temperatures (under -29ºC, -20ºF), replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles).

*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 12,000km (7,500 miles), then every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 719.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid and transfer fluid

● Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4
Inspect valve clearance
● Replace engine coolant

● Replace rear differential fluid*5
● Replace brake fluid*6

● Service front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
Maintenance

 

Continued 633

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

ENTER

3

Button

Button

4

Button

 

Set the power mode to ON.
Display the engine oil life.
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information P. 630
Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
Press the 3 / 4 button to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
1Resetting the Display

 

NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

Models with Display Audio

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 429
634

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

 

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Washer Fluid

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Battery

 

Maintenance

635

Maintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Opening the Hood

 

Maintenance

 

Hood Release Handle

 

Pull

 

Lever

 

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
Pull the hood release handle under the driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

1Opening the Hood

 

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised.

The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

636

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover

Engine Compartment Cover

 

The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover.

You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work.

Pull up on the engine compartment cover, remove it from the pins.

 

Engine Compartment Cover

 

Maintenance

637

Maintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance

 

Recommended Engine Oil

 

Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.

Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

 

Genuine Engine Oil

Commercial Engine Oil

● Honda Genuine Motor Oil

● Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.

Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

1Recommended Engine Oil

 

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements.

638

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check

 

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange).
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

 

1Oil Check

 

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

 

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

Maintenance

639

Maintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil

 

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Add oil slowly.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely.

4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.

Engine Oil Fill Cap

 

1Adding Engine Oil

 

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

Maintenance

640

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of

Drain Bolt

 

Washer

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

 

Maintenance

Continued 641

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance

 

Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface.

u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the oil filter base, and

install a new oil filter.

Oil Filter

u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oil filter rubber seal.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:

29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including

filter):

5.7 US qt (5.4 ℓ)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

642

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant

 

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1Engine Coolant

 

WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

Reserve Tank

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

 

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 637

Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

Maintenance

 

Continued 643

Maintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Radiator
1Radiator

 

Radiator

 

Cap

 

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 637

Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning.
Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

Maintenance

644

Maintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 or higher

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.

1Automatic Transmission Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) with other transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

 

Maintenance

645

Maintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Maintenance

 

Brake Fluid

 

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir

The fluid level should be between the MIN

and MAX marks on the side of the reserve

tank.

MAX

MIN

 

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

Models without washer level sensor

 

Open the cap and check the amount of window washer fluid.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

Models with washer level sensor

 

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Brake Fluid

 

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.

646

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

High beam headlight: LED type*

60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)*

Low beam headlight: LED type

Models with halogen headlights

 

High Beam Headlights

1Headlight Bulbs

 

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

Clips

 

Air Intake Duct

Driver side

Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 637

Remove the clips.
Remove the air intake duct.
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Models with LED high beam headlights

High beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Models with halogen high beam headlights

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models Continued 647

Replacing Light BulbsuDaytime Running Lights and Parking Lights
Bulb

 

Coupler

Tab

Both sides

 

Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise.
Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
1Headlight Bulbs

 

Remove the clip using Phillips-head screwdriver.

Center pin

Maintenance

 

Daytime Running Lights and Parking Lights

 

Daytime running lights and parking lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Side Marker Lights

 

Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Push until the

pin is flat.

648

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Front Turn Signal Light: 21W (Amber)

Remove the screws, pull the inner fender back.

Screws

Bulb

 

Socket

Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Maintenance

 

Fog Lights*

 

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models 649

Replacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Maintenance

 

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

 

Side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Brake/Taillight: LED

Rear Side Marker Light: LED

Rear Turn Signal Light: 21W (Amber)

Bolts

1.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove

the bolts.

2.

Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

 

Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb.
Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise.

5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on the body.

Align the pins with the body grommets, then push in until they fully seat.
1Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

Brake/taillights, rear side marker lights, and back-up lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Bulb

Socket

* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight and Back-Up Lights

Brake/Taillight and Back-Up Lights

 

Brake/taillight and back-up lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Rear License Plate Lights

 

Rear license plate lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light

 

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

 

Maintenance

651

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Maintenance

 

Checking Wiper Blades

 

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side.

Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab.

Lock Tab

Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw driver.

Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

652

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Blade

 

Blade

Retainer

 

Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by pulling the tabbed end out.
Remove the retainers from the wiper blade that has been removed, and mount to a new wiper blade.
u Correctly align the wiper blade protrusion and the retainer grooves.

Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the indent of the wiper blade.

Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then push down the lock tab.
Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side.
Maintenance

 

653

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance

 

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

 

Raise the wiper arm off.

Slide the wiper blade out from the end with

the indent.

Blade

3. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and

 

Retainer

mount to a new rubber blade.

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm, it may damage the rear window.

Rubber

654

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.

u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the

wiper arm.

 

Maintenance

655

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Maintenance

 

Checking Tires

 

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
Excessive tread wear.
Wear Indicators P. 661
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires

 

WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.

656

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

 

Label

Example

Tire Labeling

 

1Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains:

a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Example Tire Size

 

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes
The tires that came on your vehicle have a

number of markings. Those you should be

aware of are described as shown.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an

explanation of what each component means.

P235/60R18 102V

P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

235: Tire width in millimeters.

60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

18: Rim diameter in inches.

Maintenance

 

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

102: Load index (a numerical code associated with

the maximum load the tire can carry).

V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

maximum speed rating).

Continued 657

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

22 09: Date of manufacture.

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Year

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Week

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

 

Maintenance

658

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

 

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

 

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Maintenance

 

Continued 659

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance

 

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction

 

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

660

Wear Indicators

 

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Example of a Wear

 

Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)

shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the

tread has worn so that the indicator is

exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

 

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Maintenance

 

661

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

 

Maintenance

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.

662

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation

 

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

 

Front

Tires with rotation marks
1Tire Rotation

 

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front

Rotation Mark

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Maintenance

 

663

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance

 

Winter Tires

 

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:

Install them on the front tires only.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below:
Cable-type: SCC Super Z LT ZT735

Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
Drive slowly.
1Winter Tires

 

WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

664

Battery

Checking the Battery

 

The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

To access the battery terminals:

Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 637

Remove the clips using a Phillips-head screwdriver, then remove the air intake duct.
2 High Beam Headlights P. 647

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:

The audio system is disabled.
Audio System Theft Protection P. 243
The clock resets*.
Clock P. 136
1Battery

 

WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications.

Consult a dealer for more information.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models 665

BatteryuCharging the AGM Battery
Charging the AGM Battery

 

AGM labeled batteries like those installed in your vehicle require a compatible charger to be properly charged. Damage to the battery can result if the battery is charged improperly or with the wrong equipment. For more information on how to charge your vehicle’s AGM battery, consult a dealer.

 

1Battery

The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.

Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.

 

Maintenance

666

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery

 

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

 

Battery type: CR2032

Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

Battery scratching the remote transmitter.

u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
1Replacing the Remote Battery

 

WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD

The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children.

If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Maintenance

 

667

Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*

Models with Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system

Replacing the Battery

Remote Control

If it takes several pushes on the remote control buttons to operate the Blu-ray/DVD rear entertainment system, replace the batteries.

 

Battery type: AAA

Remove the cover.
2. Make sure to replace the batteries with the correct polarity.

 

1Replacing the Battery

 

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Make sure to replace the two batteries at once.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models
uuRemote Control and Wireless Headphone Care*uReplacing the Battery

Wireless Headphones
If there is no sound coming from the wireless headphones, replace the battery.

 

Battery type: AAA

Remove the screw.
2. Open the cover.

 

Cover

3. Make sure to replace the batteries with the

correct polarity.

Battery

Maintenance

 

669

Climate Control System Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Air Conditioning

 

To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

1Climate Control System Maintenance

 

NOTICE

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood:

Safety Labels P. 79
Specifications P. 712
Canadian models

: Caution

: Flammable Refrigerant

: Requires Registered

Technician to Service

: Air Conditioning

System

670

Climate Control System MaintenanceuDust and Pollen Filter
Dust and Pollen Filter

 

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter

 

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

 

Maintenance

671

Cleaning

Maintenance

 

Interior Care

 

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

 

Loop

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Interior Care

 

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.

Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches.

Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

* Not available on all models
CleaninguInterior Care
Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

The front and second row passenger’s floor mats hook over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

1Floor Mats

 

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather:

Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap.
Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models 673

CleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance

 

Exterior Care

 

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions:

If driving on roads with road salt.
If driving in coastal areas.
If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
Fold in the door mirrors.
For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Using High Pressure Cleaners
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior.
Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Washing the Vehicle

 

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

When using an automated car wash that pulls the vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure the transmission in (N position.

If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 534
674

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

1Applying Wax

 

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

Maintenance

 

Continued 675

CleaninguExterior Care
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

676

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

 

When installing accessories, check the following:

Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions.
Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 701

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications

 

WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

 

Maintenance

677

Accessories and ModificationsuModifications
Modifications

 

Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

 

Maintenance

678

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools 680

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire 681

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine 689

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak .. 690

Emergency Engine Stop 691

If the Battery Is Dead 692

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating 695

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears …697

If the Charging System Indicator Comes

On 697

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks 698

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On 699

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On 699

If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator

Comes On or Blinks 700

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks

along with the Warning Message 700

Fuses

Fuse Locations 701

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 705

Emergency Towing 706

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ..707

Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel

Container 708

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate 709

679

Tools

Types of Tools

Handling the Unexpected

 

1Types of Tools

 

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

Jack

Funnel

680

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

 

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
Put the transmission into P.
Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
1Changing a Flat Tire

 

Follow compact spare precautions:

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 681

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Changing a Flat Tire

 

Handling the Unexpected

Handle

 

Cover Wheel Nut Wrench

Push the rear edge of the handle on the floor lid and open the lid.
Pull and remove the cover. Take the wheel nut wrench and jack-handle bar out of the rear side compartment.
NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Jack

Handle Bar

 

Loosen the strap, then take the jack out.

Strap

Jack

682

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Cover

 

Rubber Plug

 

Jack

Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench

 

Bracket

Remove the cover and the rubber plug on the cargo area lining to access the shaft for the spare tire hoist.
Put the wheel nut wrench with the jack handle bar on the hoist shaft.
Turn the wrench to the left to lower the spare tire to the ground.

Keep turning the wheel nut wrench to create slack in the cable.
Remove the bracket from the spare tire.
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

 

The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is specially adapted to fit the hoist shaft. Do not use any other tool.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 683

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Wheel

 

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

 

Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
684

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
How to Set Up the Jack
Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

Jacking

Points

Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point.

u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar

and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.

1How to Set Up the Jack

 

WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:

Do not use while the engine is running.
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
Use only at the jacking points.
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Jack Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle

Continued 685

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Replacing the Flat Tire
Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around,

tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order.

Wheel nut torque:

94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m)

1Replacing the Flat Tire

 

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

686

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Storing the Flat Tire
Center Cap

 

Remove the center cap and place the flat tire face up under the hoist.
Insert the hoist bracket into the center hole of the flat tire.
1Storing the Flat Tire

 

WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the jack and tools securely before driving.

Jack Handle Bar

 

Wheel Nut Wrench

Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise to take up the hoist cable slack.
Make sure the bracket is seated in the center hole of the flat tire.

Turn the wheel nut wrench with the jack handle bar clockwise until the flat tire rests against the underbody of the vehicle and you hear the hoist click.
Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the cargo area.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 687

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Compact Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure Monitor Problem appears on the driver information interface, but this is normal.

If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the driver information interface and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).

1TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Compact Spare Tire

 

The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct.

Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem.

Handling the Unexpected

 

688

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

 

If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 692

Starter condition

Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns

Check for a message on the driver information interface.

over slowly.

If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears

The battery may be dead. Check

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 690

each of the items on the right and

uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operating range.

respond accordingly.

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 171

Check the brightness of the interior lights.

Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.

If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

2 Battery P. 665

If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 701

 

Handling the

The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 522

Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

Immobilizer System P. 163
Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 110

Check the fuses.

Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 705
If the problem continues:

Emergency Towing P. 706
Unexpected

 

689

Handling the Unexpected

 

Engine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

 

If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:

Touch the center of the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the H logo on the keyless

remote while the ENGINE START/STOP

button is flashing. The buttons on the

keyless remote should be facing you.

u The ENGINE START/STOP button

flashes for about 30 seconds.

Depress the brake pedal and press the

ENGINE START/STOP button within 10

seconds after the beeper sounds and the

ENGINE START/STOP button changes

from flashing to on.

u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

690

Engine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Emergency Engine Stop

 

The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.

U.S. models

 

The gear position automatically changes to P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

Canadian models

 

The gear position automatically changes to P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal to change the mode VEHICLE OFF.

1Emergency Engine Stop

 

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off.

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

Handling the Unexpected

 

691

If the Battery Is Dead

Handling the Unexpected

Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

1. Pull up on the engine compartment cover,

 

Engine Compartment Cover

remove it from the pins.

Pin

Remove the holding clips and the air intake duct.

1If the Battery Is Dead

 

WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

Clip

 

Air Intake Duct

692

 

Pin

Engine Cover

 

Booster Battery

 

Pull up on the engine cover, remove it from the pins.
u Start on the passenger side and lift the outermost edge of the cover.

u Move towards the driver side while applying uniform upward pressure.

Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15-volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.

Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery – terminal.
Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly.
Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
If the Battery Is Deadu
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 693

If the Battery Is Deadu
Handling the Unexpected

 

What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order:

Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery – terminal.
Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

694

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

 

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power.
Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the driver information interface.
Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then, open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the H mark may damage the engine.

Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When

Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 695

OverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Handling the Unexpected

 

Next thing to do

MIN MAX

Reserve Tank

Last thing to do
Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle goes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.

Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, remove the engine compartment cover then add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 637

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.

696

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears

■ Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.

 

What to do as soon as the warning appears
Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle
Stop the engine and let it sit for approximately three minutes.
Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 639

Start the engine and check the low oil pressure warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving again.
u The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

 

What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears

 

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

Handling the Unexpected

 

697

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

 

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system.

Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

Handling the Unexpected

 

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

698

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

U.S. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

 

The brake fluid is low.

• There is a malfunction in the brake system.

Canada ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

 

• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

 

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

Handling the Unexpected

 

699

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.

What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

Reasons for the indicator to blink The transmission is malfunctioning.
What to do when the indicator blinks
Immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Change the gear position to N after starting the engine.

u Check if the N position in the instrument panel and the indicator on the N button light/blink.

Starting the Engine P. 522
1If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

TPMS with Tire Fill Assist provides visual and audible assistance during tire pressure adjustment. With the power mode in ON, while you adjust tire pressure up or down, the system alerts you as follows:

Below recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash once every five seconds.

At recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash rapidly for ~ five seconds. Above recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and lights flash twice every three seconds.

1If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

You may not be able to start the engine.

Make sure to set the parking brake when parking your vehicle.

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Emergency Towing P. 706
700

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Located near the passenger’s side damper house. Push the tabs to open the box.

 

Tab

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Amps

(70

A)

REAR BLOWER

30 A

1

ABS/VSA MTR

40 A

ABS/VSA FSR

20

A

MAIN FAN

30 A

MAIN FUSE

150 A

SUB FAN

30 A

WIP MTR

30 A

WASHER

20 A

SUNSHADE*1

(20

A)

−*2

ENGINE MOUNT

30 A

2

FRONT BLOWER

40 A

A/C INVERTER*1

(30

A)

−*2

STANDARD AMP*1

(30

A)

−*2

REAR DEF

40 A

(30

A)

PREMIUM AMP*1

(20

A)

−*2

3

Circuit Protected

Amps

4

PARKING LIGHT

10

A

5

CRUISE CANCEL SW

(7.5 A)*1

−*2

6

STOP LIGHT

10

A

7

FI SUB VSS

(10 A)*1

−*2

8

L H/L LO

10

A

9

10

R H/L LO

10

A

11

IGPS

7.5 A

12

INJECTOR

20

A

13

H/L LO MAIN

20 A

14

FI-ECU BACKUP

(10

A)

15

FRONT FOG*

(10

A)

16

HAZARD

15 A

PASSENGER P/SEAT

(20 A)*1

17

(RECLINE)*

−*2

PASSENGER P/SEAT

(20 A)*1

18

(SLIDE)*

−*2

19

PREMIUM AMP*

(20 A)*1

−*2

 

*1:Models with Display Audio

*2:Models with color audio system

Handling the Unexpected

 

* Not available on all models Continued 701

FusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected

 

702

Circuit Protected

Amps

20

MG CLUTCH

7.5 A

21

MAIN RLY

15 A

22

FI SUB

15 A

23

IG COIL

15 A

24

DBW

15 A

25

SMALL/STOP MAIN

20 A

26

BACK UP

10 A

27

HTD STRG WHEEL*

(15 A)*1

−*2

28

HORN

10 A

29

RADIO

15 A*1

20 A*2

*1:Models with Display Audio

*2:Models with color audio system

* Not available on all models

Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box.

 

Tab

Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

ST CUT1*

(40

A)

4WD*

(20 A)

IG MAIN

30 A

1

IG MAIN2

30 A

P/TAILGATE MOTOR*

(40

A)

F/B MAIN2

60

A

F/B MAIN

60

A

EPS

60

A

2

TRAILER MAIN

(30

A)

3

TRAILER E-BRAKE

(20

A)

4

BATTERY SENSOR

7.5 A

5

H/L HI MAIN

20

A

6

P/TAILGATE CLOSER*

(20

A)

7

CTR ACC SOCKET

20 A

8

REAR ACC SOCKET*

(20 A)

9

FRONT WIPER DEICER*

(15

A)

10

ACC/IG2_MAIN

10 A

11

TRAILER CHARGE

(20

A)

12

IDLE STOP ST CUT

(30

A)

13

IDLE STOP

(30

A)

14

IDLE STOP

(30

A)

15

ELECTRONIC GEAR

(15

A)

SELECTOR

16

REAR HEATED SEAT*

(20

A)

17

ST CUT FEED BACK

7.5 A

FusesuFuse Locations
Interior Fuse Box Type A
Located under the dashboard.

 

Fuse Box

Fuse Label

Fuse locations are shown on the label on the outer side of the side panel cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

* Not available on all models

Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

1

DRIVER P/WINDOW

20 A

2

DOOR LOCK

20 A

3

SMART

7.5 A

4

PASSENGER P/WINDOW

20 A

5

FRONT ACC SOCKET

20 A

6

FUEL PUMP

20 A

7

ACG

15 A

8

FRONT WIPER

7.5 A

9

IG1 SMART

7.5 A

10

SRS

10 A

11

DRIVER REAR P/WINDOW

20 A

12

13

PASSENGER REAR

20 A

P/WINDOW

14

FUEL LID

20 A

15

DRIVER P/SEAT (RECLINE)*

(20 A)

16

(7.5 A)

17

FRONT SEAT HEATER*

(20 A)

18

INTR LT

7.5 A

19

DRIVER REAR

10 A

DOOR UNLOCK

20

PASSENGER SIDE

10 A

DOOR UNLOCK

21

DRL

7.5 A

22

KEY LOCK

7.5 A

23

A/C

7.5 A

Circuit Protected

Amps

24

IG1a FEED BACK

7.5 A

25

INST PANEL LIGHTS

7.5 A

26

LUMBAR SUPPORT*

(10 A)

27

PARKING LIGHTS

7.5 A

28

OPTION

10 A

29

BACK LT

7.5 A

30

REAR WIPER

10 A

31

ST MOTOR

7.5 A

32

SRS

7.5 A

33

PASSENGER SIDE

10 A

DOOR LOCK

34

DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK

10 A

35

DRIVER SIDE

10 A

DOOR UNLOCK

36

DRIVER P/SEAT (SLIDE)*

(20 A)

37

PASSENGER H/L HI

10 A

38

DRIVER H/L HI

10 A

39

IG1b FEED BACK

7.5 A

40

ACC

7.5 A

41

DRIVER REAR DOOR LOCK

10 A

42

 

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

 

703

FusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected

 

Interior Fuse Box Type B
Located under the dashboard.

 

Fuse Box

Fuse Label

Fuse locations are shown on the image. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

A

METER

10 A

B

ABS/VSA

7.5 A

C

ACG

7.5 A

D

MICU

7.5 A

E

AUDIO

15 A

F

BACK UP

10 A

G

ACC

7.5 A

704

FusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

1.

Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF

Blown Fuse

(LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories

off.

2.

Remove the fuse box cover.

3.

Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

Combined

u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

screwdriver to remove the screw and

Fuse

replace it with a new one.

4.

Inspect the small fuses in the engine

Fuse Puller

compartment and the vehicle interior.

u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new

one.

 

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage.

2 Fuse Locations P. 701

Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse box.

Handling the Unexpected

 

705

Emergency Towing

Handling the Unexpected

 

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

All models

 

Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

2WD models

 

Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

 

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.

NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

706

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure:

1.

Open the tailgate.

2.

Wrap a cloth around the built-in key. Put it

Cover

into the cover slot as shown in the image,

and remove the cover.

 

1What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

 

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

3. Pull the release lever toward you.

 

Release Lever

u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door

when it is pulled.

Handling the Unexpected

 

707

Refueling

Handling the Unexpected

 

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

1.

Turn off the engine.

Funnel

2.

Press the fuel fill door release button.

Cover

u The fuel fill door opens.

3.

Wrap a cloth around the built-in key. Put it

into the cover slot as shown in the image,

and remove the cover.

4.

Remove the funnel from the cover.

5.

Place the end of the funnel on the lower

part of filler opening, then insert it slowly

 

and fully.

u Make sure that the end of the funnel goes down along with the filler pipe.

Funnel

Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

 

7. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.

u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it.

8. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.

Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

708

If You Cannot Open the Tailgate

What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure:

Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

Cover

cover on the inside of the tailgate.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

1What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate

 

Following up:

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

Models with power tailgate

 

Screwdriver

Lever

Models without power tailgate

 

Screwdriver

To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing the lever to the right using a flat-tip screwdriver.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Lever

709

This page intentionally left blank.

710

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications ………………………………

712

Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers

Testing of Readiness Codes…………..

717

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Warranty Coverages ……………………

719

Engine Number, and Transmission

Authorized Manuals…………………….

722

Number …………………………………..

714

Customer Service Information………

723

Devices that Emit Radio Waves …….

715

Reporting Safety Defects ……………..

716

711

Specifications

Information

 

Vehicle Specifications
Model

Pilot

No. of Passengers:

Front

2

Rear

2nd Row

2*1

3*2

3rd Row

3

Total

7*1

8*2

Weights:

Gross Vehicle

See the certification label on the driver’s

Weight Rating

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Front)

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Rear)

doorjamb

Gross Combined Weight

U.S.:

8,025 lbs (3,640 kg)*3

Rating

9,755 lbs (4,425 kg)*4

Canada:

4,425 kg

*1: Models with second row captain seat

*2: Models with second row bench seat

*3: 2WD models

*4: AWD models

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

21.3

– 23.1 oz (605 – 655 g)

Lubricant Type

RL85HM (POE)

Quantity

7.75

– 9.33 cu-in (127 – 153 cm3)

Engine Specifications
Displacement

211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm3)

Spark Plugs

NGK

DILZKR7B11G

Fuel
Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)

Washer Fluid
U.S.: 4 US qt (3.8 L)

Tank Capacity

Canada: 5.6 US qt (5.3 L)

■ Light Bulbs

 

Headlights (Low Beam)

LED

Headlights (High Beam)

60 W (HB3)*1, *2

LED*3

Fog Lights*

LED

Front Turn Signal Lights

21 W (Amber)

Front Side Marker Lights

LED

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights

LED

(on Door Mirrors)*

Brake/Taillights

LED

Rear Side Marker Lights

LED

Back-Up Lights

LED

Rear Turn Signal Lights

21 W (Amber)

High-Mount Brake Light

LED

Rear License Plate Lights

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

LED*

5 W*

Ceiling Lights

LED*

5 W*

Ambient Lights

LED

Vanity Mirror Lights *

1.4 W

Door Courtesy Lights*

3.8 W

Door Inner Handle Lights*

LED

Door Pocket Lights*

LED

Beverage Holder Light*

LED

Foot Lights*

LED

Console Compartment Light

1.4 W

Glove Box Light

1.4 W

Cargo Area Lights

8 W

 

*1: Models without navigation system

*2: Models with navigation system and 18 inch wheel

*3: Models with navigation system and 20 inch wheel

* Not available on all models
uuSpecificationsu

Brake Fluid
Engine Oil
■ Tire

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified

Honda ATF Type-3.1 or higher

Capacity

Change

3.5 US qt (3.3 L)

Recommended

Capacity

·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Change 5.4 US qt (5.1 L)

Change

including 5.7 US qt (5.4 L)

filter

Size

245/60R18 105H*1

245/50R20 102H*2

Regular

Pressure

32

(220

[2.2])*1

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

35

(240

[2.4])*2

Compact

Size

T165/80D17 104M

Pressure

Spare

60

(420

[4.2])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Rear Differential Fluid*
Specified

Honda DPSF-II

Capacity

Change

1.92 US qt (1.82 L)

Transfer Assembly Fluid*
Specified

Honda HGO-1

Capacity

Change

0.45 US qt (0.43 L)

Engine Coolant
Specified

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

1.96 US gal (7.40 L)

Capacity

(change including the remaining 0.22 US gal

(0.82 L) in the reserve tank)

Regular

18 x 8J*1

Wheel Size

20 x 8J*2

Compact Spare

17 x 4T

*1: Models with 18 inch wheel

*2: Models with 20 inch wheel

Information

 

* Not available on all models 713

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.

The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows:

 

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Automatic Transmission

Number

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Cover

Information

 

Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number

714

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Information

 

715

Reporting Safety Defects

Information

 

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

716

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

 

Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly.

The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes

 

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Information

 

Continued 717

Emissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information

 

718

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Information

 

Continued 719

Warranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
Information

 

720

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

Attention: Warranty Claim

2000 Traverwood Drive,

Ann Arbor, MI 48105;

[email protected]

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

 

721

Authorized Manuals

Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

 

722

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners Canadian Owners

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Canada Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Service Customer Relations

Mail Stop CHI-5 180 Honda Boulevard

1919 Torrance Blvd. Markham, ON

Torrance, CA 90501-2746 L6C 0H9

Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: [email protected]

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

 

When you call or write, please give us the following information:

Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 714
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the problem
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Information

 

723

This page intentionally left blank.

724

Index

A

AAC 259, 312, 318, 321

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 606

AC Power Outlet 218

Accessories and Modifications 677

Accessory Power Sockets 217

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 574

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

(Amber) 94

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator

(Green) 94

Additives

Coolant 643

Engine Oil 638

Washer 646

Additives, Engine Oil 638

Adjusting

Armrest 207

Front Seats 194

Head Restraints 200, 201, 202

Mirrors 192

Rear Seats 204

Second Row Seats 198

Steering Wheel 191

third row seat 199

Agile Handling Assist 548

Air Conditioning System

(Climate Control System) 231

Changing the Mode 231

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows 232

Dust and Pollen Filter ………………………….

671

Auxiliary Input Jack…………………………….

242

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ……………….

232

Changing the Screen Brightness …………..

293

Sensor ……………………………………………..

237

Display Setup …………………………….

253, 293

Synchronization Mode ………………………..

234

Error Messages………………………………….

344

Using Automatic Climate Control

………… 231

File Manager …………………………………….

286

Air Pressure …………………………………

657, 713

General Information …………………………..

349

Airbags ………………………………………………..

47

HD Subchannel …………………………………

301

Advanced Airbags ……………………………….

53

Home Screen…………………………………….

272

After a Collision…………………………………..

51

HondaLink® …………………………………….

329

Airbag Care ………………………………………..

61

How to Delete a File …………………………..

289

Event Data Recorder ………………………………

0

How to Transfer a File ………………………..

286

Front Airbags (SRS) ………………………………

50

How to Update Wirelessly …………………..

280

Indicator ……………………………………….

58, 86

How to Update with a USB Device………..

284

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ………………

59

iPod …………………………………………

256, 315

Sensors………………………………………………

47

Limitations for Manual Operation …………

294

Side Airbags ……………………………………….

55

MP3/WMA/AAC…………..

259, 312, 318, 321

Side Curtain Airbags …………………………….

57

My Honda Music ……………………………….

321

All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator ……………

91

Playing a CD……………………………………..

312

AM/FM Radio ………………………………

254, 298

Playing AM/FM Radio …………………………

298

Android Auto……………………………………..

340

Playing Bluetooth® Audio …………….

262, 325

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………………

606

Playing SiriusXM® Radio ……………………..

302

Indicator …………………………………………….

85

Playing Social Playlist ………………………….

327

Apple CarPlay …………………………………….

337

Reactivating ……………………………………..

243

Armrest ……………………………………………..

207

Recommended CDs……………………………

350

Audio Remote Controls……………………….

244

Remote Controls ……………………………….

244

Audio System ……………………….

240, 247, 265

Security Code……………………………………

243

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

252, 292

Selecting an Audio Source…………………..

294

AM/FM Radio …………………………….

254, 298

Siri Eyes Free …………………………………….

336

Android Auto ……………………………………

340

Status Area ………………………………………

277

Apple CarPlay ……………………………………

337

System Updates…………………………………

280

Audio/Information Screen …………….

248, 266

Theft Protection ………………………………..

243

Index

725

Index

Updating Apps ………………………………….

278

If the Battery Is Dead ………………………….

692

USB Flash Drives ………………….

259, 318, 353

Maintenance (Checking the Battery)……..

665

USB Port …………………………………………..

241

Belts (Seat) …………………………………………..

39

Wallpaper Setup …………………………

250, 270

Beverage Holders ……………………………….

215

Wi-Fi Connection……………………………….

334

Blind spot information System …………….

549

Audio/Information Screen…………….

248, 266

Bluetooth® Audio ………………………..

262, 325

Authorized Manuals……………………………

722

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ………..

451, 476

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ……………..

152

Blu-ray/DVD Rear Entertainment

Auto High-Beam …………………………………

179

System ……………………………………………..

374

Indicator …………………………………………….

86

Audio Sources for Front and Rear Seats …

395

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

…………… 91

Auxiliary Console Panels ……………………..

376

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator

DVD or Blu-rayTM Player Error Messages …

420

(Amber) ……………………………………………..

91

Front Control Panel Operation……………..

387

Auto Idle-stop …………………………………….

538

HDMITM Port ……………………………………..

377

OFF Button ……………………………………….

539

How Much Farther?TM ………………………..

394

Automatic Intermittent Wipers ……………

184

Media Servers……………………………………

394

Automatic Lighting …………………………….

176

Operating the System…………………………

378

Automatic Transmission ………………………

529

Overhead Screen ……………………………….

377

Creeping ………………………………………….

529

Playable Disc Region Codes …………………

418

Fluid ………………………………………………..

645

Playable Disc Types…………………………….

418

Kickdown …………………………………………

529

Playable Discs ……………………………………

396

Operating the Shift Button…………………..

532

Playing a Disc in the Rear…………………….

392

Shifting…………………………………………….

530

Playing a DVD/Blu-rayTM ………………………

381

Auxiliary Input Jack …………………………….

242

Playing a Video Using the HDMITM ………..

393

Average Fuel Economy………………………..

116

Playing an iPod and a USB Flash Drive in

AWD Torque ………………………………………

119

the Rear …………………………………………

392

Playing Apps …………………………………….

390

B

Rear DVD or Blu-rayTM Menu ……………….

382

Rear System Setup……………………………..

388

Battery……………………………………………….

665

Recommended Discs ………………………….

419

Charging System Indicator ……………..

83, 697

Selecting the App using Front Control

Panel 387

Setting the DVD or Blu-rayTM Menu 389

System Controls 381, 391

System Settings 385

Video Accessibility 379

Wireless Headphones 375

Booster Seats (For Children) 77

Brake System 604

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 606

Brake Assist System 607

Fluid 646

Foot Brake 605

Indicator 82, 699

Parking Brake 604

Brake System (Red)

Indicator 699

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) 188

Bulb Replacement 647

Back-Up Lights 651

Brake Lights 651

Brake/Taillights 650

Daytime Running Lights 648

Fog Lights 649

Front Side Marker Lights 648

Front Turn Signal Lights 649

Headlights 647

High-Mount Brake Light 651

Parking Lights 648

Rear License Plate Lights 651

Rear Side Marker Lights 650

726

Rear Turn Signal Lights 650

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator

Lights 650

Bulb Specifications 712

C

CabinTalkTM 502

Car Wash Mode 534

Carbon Monoxide Gas 78

Carrying Cargo 505, 507

CD Player 312

Certification Label 714

Changing Bulbs 647

Charging System Indicator 83, 697

Child Safety 62

Childproof Door Locks 151

Child Seat 62

Booster Seats 77

Child Seat for Infants 64

Child Seat for Small Children 65

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Seat Belt 71

Larger Children 76

Rear-facing Child Seat 64

Selecting a Child Seat 66

Childproof Door Locks 151

Cleaning the Exterior 674

Cleaning the Interior 672

Climate Control System 231

Changing the Mode 231

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows 232

Dust and Pollen Filter 671

Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode 232

Sensors 237

Synchronization Mode 234

Using Automatic Climate Control 231

Clock 136

Coat Hook 222

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 562

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) Indicator 94, 95

Compact Spare Tire 681, 713

Console Compartment 213

Controls 135

Coolant (Engine) 643

Adding to the Radiator 644

Adding to the Reserve Tank 643

Overheating 695

Temperature Gauge 110

Creeping (Automatic Transmission) 529

Cross Traffic Monitor 615

Cup Holders 215

Customer Service Information 723

Customized Features 125, 422, 429

D

Daytime Running Lights 182

Dead Battery 692

Defaulting All the Settings 447

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows 232

Detachable Anchor 44

Devices that Emit Radio Waves 715

Dimming

Headlights 175

Rearview Mirror 192

Dipstick (Engine Oil) 639

Directional Signals (Turn Signal) 174

Door Mirrors 193

Doors 139

Auto Door Locking 152

Auto Door Unlocking 152

Door Open Message 38

Keys 139

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside 149

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside 142

Lockout Prevention System 148

DOT Tire Quality Grading 659

Driver Information Interface 111

Accessing Content 113

Warning and Information Messages 97

Driving 503

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 574

Automatic Transmission 529

Braking 604

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 520

Shifting Gear 530

Index

727

Index

Starting the Engine …………………………….

522

Displaying Maintenance Minder

Front Seats…………………………………………

194

Driving Position Memory System………….

189

Information …………………………………….

630

Adjusting …………………………………………

194

Dust and Pollen Filter ………………………….

671

Low Oil Pressure Warning……………………

697

Front Sensor Camera ………………………….

601

Recommended Engine Oil …………………..

638

Fuel ……………………………………………..

25, 621

E

ENGINE START/STOP Button ………………..

171

Economy………………………………………….

624

EPS (Electric Power Steering) System

…… 699

Gauge …………………………………………….

110

Eco Assist® System…………………………………

12

Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 78

Instant Fuel Economy …………………………

116

ECON Button………………………………………

543

Exterior Care (Cleaning)………………………

674

Low Fuel Indicator……………………………….

85

Econ Mode

Exterior Mirrors ………………………………….

193

Range ……………………………………………..

116

Indicator …………………………………………….

90

Recommendation………………………………

621

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

F

Refueling …………………………………………

621

Indicator ……………………………………..

87, 699

Fuel Economy …………………………………….

624

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ………….

546

Features …………………………………………….

239

Fuel Fill Door ………………………………..

25, 622

Emergency………………………………………….

706

File Manager………………………………………

286

Unable to Unlock ………………………………

707

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) …….

717

Filters

Fuses …………………………………………………

701

Engine

Dust and Pollen …………………………………

671

Inspecting and Changing ……………………

705

Coolant ……………………………………………

643

Oil…………………………………………………..

641

Locations ……………………

701, 702, 703, 704

If the Battery Is Dead ………………………….

692

Flat Tire ……………………………………………..

681

Number ……………………………………………

714

Floor Mats………………………………………….

673

G

Oil …………………………………………………..

638

Fluids

Remote Engine Start …………………………..

524

Automatic Transmission ……………………..

645

Gasoline (Fuel)

Starting ……………………………………………

522

Brake ………………………………………………

646

Economy………………………………………….

624

Engine Compartment Cover ………………..

637

Engine Coolant …………………………………

643

Gauge …………………………………………….

110

Engine Coolant …………………………………..

643

Windshield Washer ……………………………

646

Information………………………………………

621

Adding to the Radiator ……………………….

644

FM/AM Radio………………………………

254, 298

Instant Fuel Economy …………………………

116

Adding to the Reserve Tank …………………

643

Fog Light Indicator……………………………….

89

Low Fuel Indicator……………………………….

85

Overheating………………………………………

695

Fog Lights ………………………………………….

178

Refueling …………………………………………

621

Temperature Gauge……………………………

110

Folding Down the Second Row Seat…….

205

Gauges………………………………………………

110

Engine Oil…………………………………………..

638

Folding Down the Third Row Seat ……….

206

Gear Position Indicator………………….

83, 532

Adding …………………………………………….

640

Foot Brake …………………………………………

605

Gear Shift Positions

Checking ………………………………………….

639

Front Airbags (SRS)……………………………….

50

Automatic Transmission ……………………..

530

728

Glass (care) 675

Glove Box 213

H

Handling the Unexpected 679

Hands Free Access 155

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) 451, 476

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook

and Call History 465, 485

Automatic Transferring 484

Caller ID Information 463

Displaying Messages 495

Favorite Contacts 486

HFL Buttons 451, 476

HFL Menus 453, 479

HFL Status Display 452, 478

In Case of Emergency 499

Limitations for Manual Operation 452, 478

Making a Call 470, 488

Options During a Call 475, 491

Phone Setup 457, 481

Receiving a Call 474, 491

Receiving a Text Message 493

Ring Tone 463, 484

Selecting a Phone 494

Speed Dial 466

To Clear the System 464

To Set Up a Text Message Options 492

Hazard Warning Button 6

HD RadioTM 301

HDMITM Port 377

Head Restraints 200, 201, 202

Headlights 175

Auto High-Beam 179

Automatic Operation 176

Dimming 175, 182

Operating 175

Heated Steering Wheel 228

Heated Windshield Button 187

Heater (Steering Wheel) 228

Heaters (Seat) 225, 226, 227

HFL (HandsFreeLink®) 451, 476

High Beam Indicator 88

Hill Start Assist System 527

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 448

Honda App License Agreement 354

Honda Sensing® 26

HondaLink® 329

I

Identification Numbers 714

Engine and Transmission 714

Vehicle Identification 714

Illumination Control 188

Button 188

Immobilizer System 163

Indicator 89

Indicators 82

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) 94

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Green) 94

All-wheel drive (AWD) 91

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 85

Auto High-Beam 86

Auto Idle Stop (Green) 91

Auto Idle Stop System (Amber) 91

Blind spot information 96, 550

Brake System (Amber) 82

Brake System (Red) 82, 699

Charging System 83, 697

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 94, 95

Econ Mode 90

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System.. 87, 699

Fog Light 89

Gear Position 83

Hazard Warning 88

High Beam 88

Immobilizer System 89

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 589

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(Amber) 92

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(Green) 92

Lights On 88

Low Fuel 85

Low Oil Pressure Warning 697

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS 88, 700

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 83, 698

Parking Brake and Brake System 699

Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) .. 82

Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) 82

Index

729

Index

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) 93

Seat Belt Reminder 40, 85

Security System Alarm 89

Supplemental Restraint System 58, 86

System Message 90

Turn Signal 88

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF 87, 547

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)

System 86, 546

Information 711

Instant Fuel Economy 116

Instrument Panel 81

Brightness Control 188

Intelligent Traction Management

System 544

Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4) 554

Interior Lights 209

Interior Rearview Mirror 192

iPad 352

iPhone 352

iPod 256, 315, 352

J

Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) 685

Jump Starting 692

K

Key Number Tag 140

Keyless Lockout Prevention 148

Keys 139

Lockout Prevention 148

Number Tag 140

Rear Door Won’t Open 151

Remote Transmitter 147

Types and Functions 139

Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) 529

L

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 587

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Indicator (Amber) 92

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Indicator (Green) 92

LaneWatchTM 552

LATCH (Child Seats) 67, 73

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/

Android Auto 366

License Information 369

Lights 175, 647

Automatic 176

Bulb Replacement 647

Daytime Running Lights 182

High Beam Indicator 88

Interior 209

Light Switches 175

Lights On Indicator 88

Turn Signals 174

Load Limits 507

Locking/Unlocking 139

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking 152

Childproof Door Locks 151

From Inside 149

From Outside 142

Keys 139

Using a Key 148

Lockout Prevention System 148

Low Battery Charge 697

Low Fuel Indicator 85

Low Oil Pressure Warning 697

Lower Anchors 67, 73

Lubricant Specifications Chart 713

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) 507

Lumbar Support 194, 195

Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch 195

M

Maintenance 118, 625

Battery 665

Brake Fluid 646

Cleaning 672

Coolant 643

Maintenance MinderTM 629

Oil 639

Precautions 626

Radiator 644

Remote Control 668

Remote Transmitter 667

Replacing Light Bulbs 647

730

Safety 627

Service Items 632

Tires 656

Transmission Fluid 645

Under the Hood 635

Wireless Headphone 669

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 83, 698

Map Lights 210

Maximum Load Limit 507

Meters, Gauges 110

Mirrors 192

Adjusting 192

Door 193

Exterior 193

Interior Rearview 192

Modifications (and Accessories) 677

Moonroof 169

MP3 259, 312, 318, 321

MP3/WMA/AAC 259, 312, 318, 321

Multi-View Rear Camera 619

My Honda Music 321

N

Navigation 117

Now Playing 120

Numbers (Identification) 714

O

Odometer 112

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 520

Oil (Engine) 638

Adding 640

Checking 639

Displaying Maintenance Minder

Information 630

Low Oil Pressure Warning 697

Oil Life 118

Recommended Engine Oil 638

Viscosity 638

Open Source Licenses 368

Opening/Closing

Hood 636

Moonroof 169

Power Windows 166

Tailgate 153

Operating the Switches Around the

Steering Wheel 171

Outside Temperature Display 112

Overheating 695

P

Paddle Shifters (Sequential Mode) 24, 537

Panic Mode 165

Panoramic Roof 170

Parking 608

Parking Brake 604

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator 699

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (Amber) 82

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (Red) 82

Parking Sensor System 610

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 59

Passing Indicators 175

Phone 119

Playing Bluetooth® Audio 262, 325

Power Tailgate 155

Hands Free Access 155

Power Windows 166

Precautions While Driving 528

Driving Guidelines for Your Utility

Vehicle 528

Rain 528

Pregnant Women 45

Puncture (Tire) 681

R

Radiator 644

Radio (FM/AM) 254, 298

Radio (SiriusXM®) 302

Radio Data System (RDS) 255, 300

Range 116

RDS (Radio Data System) 255, 300

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) 717

Index

731

Index

Rear Climate Control System

From the Rear Panel 236

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button 186

Rear Entertainment System 374

Rear Seats 204

Second Row Seat 204, 205

Third Row Seat 206

Rearview Mirror 192

Refueling 621

Fuel Gauge 110

Gasoline 621, 712

Low Fuel Indicator 85

Regulations 557, 659, 715

Remote Engine Start 524

Remote Transmitter 147

Replacement

Battery 667, 668, 669

Bulbs 647

Front Wiper Blade Rubber 652

Fuses 701, 702, 703, 704

Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 654

Tires 662

Reporting Safety Defects 716

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror 193

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) 596

On and Off 598

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)

Indicator 93

S

Safe Driving 33

Safety Check 38

Safety Labels 79

Safety Message 3

Seat Belts 39

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor 43

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 41

Checking 46

Detachable Anchor 44

Fastening 42

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Seat Belt 71

Pregnant Women 45

Reminder 40

Warning Indicator 40, 85

Seat Heaters 225, 226, 227

Seat Ventilators 226

Seats 194

Adjusting 194

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support 194

Front Seats 194

Rear Seats 204

Seat Heaters 225, 226, 227

Seat Ventilators 226

Second Row Seat 204, 205

Third Row Seat 206

Second Row Outer Seats Heaters 227

Second Row Seat (Folding Down) 205

Security System 163

Immobilizer System Indicator 89

Security System Alarm Indicator 89

Select Button 23, 530

Operation 23, 532

Selecting a Child Seat 66

Selector Knob (Audio) 247

Sequential Mode 536

Sequential Mode Operation 537

Setting the Clock 136

Settings

Arrange Apps 123

Show Tachometer 124

Shift Button 23, 530

Shifting (Transmission) 23, 530

Shoulder Anchor 43

Show Tachometer 124

Show/Hide Apps 122

Side Airbags 55

Side Curtain Airbags 57

Siri Eyes Free 336

SiriusXM® Radio 302

Snow Tires 664

Social Playlist 327

Spare Tire 681, 713

Spark Plugs 712

Specifications 712

Specified Fuel 621, 712

Speedometer 111

SRS Airbags (Airbags) 50

Starting Assist Brake Function 542

Starting the Engine 522

Does Not Start 689

732

If the Battery Is Dead 692

Remote Engine Start 524

Steering Wheel 191

Adjusting 191

Heater 228

Stopping 608

Summer Tires 664

Sunglasses Holder 223

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 50

Switches

(Around the Steering Wheel) 6, 7, 171

SYNC Mode 234

System Message Indicator 90

System Updates 280

T

Tachometer 111

Tailgate 153

Unable to Open 709

Temperature

Gauge 110

Outside Temperature Display 112

Temperature Gauge 110

Temperature Sensor 112, 237

Third Row Seat (Folding Down) 206

Third Row Seat Access 204

Tie-down Anchors 229

Time (Setting) 136

Tire Fill Assist 700

Tire Pressure 118

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Indicator 88

Tires 656

Air Pressure 657, 713

Checking and Maintaining 656

Inspection 656

Labeling 657

Puncture (Flat Tire) 681

Regulations 659

Rotation 663

Spare Tire 681, 713

Summer 664

Tire Chains 664

Wear Indicators 661

Winter 664

Tools 680

Towing a Trailer 510

Equipment and Accessories 513

Load Limits 510

Towing Your Vehicle 519

Emergency 706

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Indicator 88

TPMS with Tire Fill Assist 555

Indicator 700

Tire Fill Assist 700

Trailer Stability Assist 517

Transmission 23, 530

Automatic 23, 530

Fluid 645

Gear Position Indicator 83, 532

Number 714

Sequential Mode 536

Trip Computer 115

Troubleshooting 679

Blown Fuse 701, 702, 703, 704

Brake Pedal Vibrates 29

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door 30

Emergency Towing 706

Engine Won’t Start 689

Noise When Braking 31

Overheating 695

Puncture/Flat Tire 681

Rear Door Won’t Open 29, 151

Warning Indicators 82

Turn Signals 174

Indicators (Instrument Panel) 88

U

Under-floor Storage Area 230

Units 120

Unlocking the Doors 142

Unlocking the Front Doors from the

Inside 149

USB Flash Drives 259, 318, 353

USB Port 241

V

Vanity Mirrors 9

Vehicle Customization 125

Index

733

Index

Vehicle Identification Number……………..

714

Washer Fluid …………………………………….

646

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)……………

546

Wiper Blades …………………………………….

652

Off Button ………………………………………..

547

Wipers and Washers…………………………..

183

System Indicator …………………………..

86, 546

Winter Tires ……………………………………….

664

Viscosity (Oil)……………………………….

638, 713

Snow Tires ……………………………………….

664

Voice Control Operation ……………………..

295

Tire Chains ……………………………………….

664

Audio Commands………………………………

297

Wipers and Washers……………………………

183

Phone Commands ……………………………..

297

Automatic Intermittent Wipers …………….

184

Voice Portal Screen …………………………….

296

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades …..

652

Voice Recognition………………………………

295

Front ……………………………………………….

183

Rear ………………………………………………..

185

W

Wireless Charger ………………………………..

219

WMA ……………………………

259, 312, 318, 321

Wallpaper……………………………………

250, 270

Worn Tires …………………………………………

656

Warning and Information Messages ………

97

Warning Indicator On/Blinking…………….

697

Warning Labels …………………………………….

79

Warnings ……………………………………………

117

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately)………………………………………..

719

Watts …………………………………………………

712

Wear Indicators (Tire)………………………….

661

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)…………

685

Wi-Fi Connection ………………………………..

334

Window Washers………………………………..

183

Adding/Refilling Fluid………………………….

646

Switch ……………………………………………..

183

Windows (Opening and Closing)………….

166

Windshield …………………………………………

183

Cleaning…………………………………………..

675

Defrosting/Defogging …………………………

232

734

 

owners.honda.com (U.S.)

honda.ca (Canada)

31TG7660

2022 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual

OM-16777

00X31-TG7-6600

© 2021 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

 

Leave a Reply 0

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *


This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.